Home

tm 5-4210-228-14&p-1 technical manual

1. 2 17 N B H eeso De rape iste hire pew aw NOTE When Ordering include Spotlight Length from this Chart PAGE 3 TM 5 4210 228 14 amp P 1 PART Suggested PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION LIST PRICE NUMBER DESCRIPTION eher 6779 Shell Assy 1250 18 43 9007 PA o 30 7015 Gasket Rooflight 73 9007 ER 53 7020 Se 3 33 9009 D Washep u nn 113 7041 SCTOW p 17 9009 5 euet ss ure 13 7053 SWICK u u ulasan Rees 5 17 9013 Grommet aa aaa 17 7178 AG Shell Assy 30 73 9028 Flasher 12V Unison 72 7209 Nut 20 9030 Flasher 12V Alternately 9 40 7221 Pivot Housing 17 27 9052 15 Wire AS 1 03 7240 SCTOW e AS 9052 15A Wire 5 1 03 7259 Washer 4 4 13 9090 BUSHING ee 1 27 7286 Screw LE 47 9091 Grommet ENER Ee 180 7401 Stand ene 8 63 9204 Washer nn 1 20 7406 Carriage Bolt 90 9204 A 1 07 7409 Wing Nut e KA 9500 Bracket 1 63 7424 AR Auto Socket e 0 940 9509 Lock 13 7424 M Marine Plug 6 13 9604 e 1 60 7424 MS Marine 8 80 9604 A A ence AA 1 80 7425 Auto Plug un ens 2 70 10067 9 90
2. 3 60 8678 SAG Shell 30 73 20059 Bracket Pad 2 37 8965U Ring Assy 300 6 30 30000 Upper COGI tcc 46 80 8978 Shell Assy 300 10 00 30001 Lower 30 23 9002 5 Bracket Arm 4 00 30002 Bracket 3 97 9002 T Bracket Arm SS ele ee Be 2 93 30003 Support Strap WOMEN PENES 8 20 9003 Bracket 1 63 30004 Body Strap sen 8 70 9004 Cup Washer 63 30005 Support AFM 10 97 9005 Cap 37 30006 Suction Outras 3 77 9006 B Carriage Bolt 6 1 73 30009 Threaded 2 70 9006 L Carriage Bolt 1 3 4 70 30010 Acorn Nutte 3 03 9006 P Cap Screw prre 13 30012 Sheet Metal Screw EEN KEN 37 ALL PRICES AND SPECIFICATIONS WITHOUT NOTICE A SERVICE CHARGE OF 1 50 WILL BE APPLIED TO ALL ORDERS LESS THAN 15 00 FOR REPLACEMENT SEALED BEAM LAMPS SEE FORM 128 UNITY MANUFACTURING CO 1260 CLYBOURN AVE CHICAGO ILLINOIS 60610 PHONE 312 943 5200 PAGE 4 TM 5 4210 228 14 amp P 1 FEDERAL SIGN AND SIGNAL CORPORATION Siren PA Control System PA 2100 with Michphone FN 900 and Speaker TS 100 Ansul Part No S 52917 Warning Light Aero Dynic 24
3. 290A1039 Figure 3 2 Siren Module Rear View TM 5 4210 228 14 amp P 1 If one or two 58 watt speakers such as Federal s CP 25 or TS 24 are being installed set the speaker HI LOW switch SW302 to LOW nude the location of SW302 Connect the speaker leads to the SPKR terminals with AWG 18 wire as shown figure 3 3 CAUTION When using 58 watt speakers ALWAYS be sure that the Speaker switch is set to LO If the speaker switch is set to HI the 58 watt speakers will probably be damaged or destroyed When 100 watt speakers such as Federal s CP100 or TS100 are being installed set SW302 to HI before connecting the speakers to the siren Use AWG 18 wire as indicated figure 3 3 When two speakers are used it is necessary to connect the speakers in parallel and in phase for optimum performance This can be accomplished by connecting the speaker leads marked 1 to the same SPKR terminal on the siren and the two leads marked 2 to the other SPKR terminal seelfigure 3 3 The PA 2100 is capable of driving only one TS200 speaker Therefore if a TS200 is to be used with the siren DO NOT connect any other speaker to the siren Follow the instructions packed with the TS200 and set the speaker switch to HI before connecting the speaker to the siren with AWG 18 wire see figure 3 4 REAR PANEL OF SIRACOM T CONTROL MODULE 29041020 Figure 3 3 58 Watt and 100 Watt Speaker Connections REA
4. 87 1 50 Radio Control Cable Kit 1836 Wedge 20 1 51C Radio Control Cable Kit 3026 Felt Washer nos 43 2 6 Black Button SPR 70A 3059 Washer 13 2 7 White Button SPR 70A 3062 Bushing 1 00 2 27 White Button SPR 73A 73B 4 67 3089 Felt Washer 20 2 28 Blue Button SPR 73A 73B 4 67 4165U Ring Assy 520 250 6 30 2 30 White Button PC75A 4166U Ring Assy U250 6 30 SPR 75A essen 4 67 4178 Shell 520 10 00 2 31 Blue ron PC75A 4209 Washera E 87 Ge E E Einem ntes 4 67 4215 Gasket 17 4 16 Mounting 56 93 6001 Handle Housing 6 83 11 1 Horn Ring Control 6002 SW bii atem 3 20 Selector Switch 15 67 6029 Tube P 313DD SGIBW esoe see 13 See Noles esee 5 03 P 317DC 17 6030 17 317EE SW nenne 13 6040 A 50 491HG Boll eee eyes 43 6051 A ee 20 491 S Foot Switch 61 70 6100 Housing Long 6 83 823 uu n uu Ze 2 37 6100 H Housing Short 6 83 854 Sleeve d
5. aan Air filter 1200 22 Spark 30 Turning the cutter arm 1200 Maintenance Working Ree EE Inhaltsverzeichnis siehe Seite Technische Daten 3 Kennzeichnung 5 S cherheitsvorschriften 8 E nbau des Trennarms K1200 10 Trennscheibe 12 Antriebsriemen K65 14 Antriebsriemen K1200 16 Splitterschutz 18 Kraftstofftank 18 Kraftstoffgemisch 19 Regler 20 Vorschriftsmassige Anwerfstellung und Anwerfen der Maschine 21 Anwerfvorrichtung 21 Luftfilter K65 24 Luftfilter K1200 26 Vergaser 28 Zundkerze 29 Umdrenung des Trennarms K65 30 Umdrehung des Trennarms K1200 31 Wartungsplan 33 Arbettstechnik 34 Werkzeuge 35 Table des matieres voir page Donn es techniques 3 Identification 5 Directives de s curit 9 Montage de bras de d coupeur K1200 10 Disque d coupeur 12 Courroie d entrainement K65 14 Courroie d entrainement K1200 16 Protecteur 18 R servorr de carburant 18 M lange de carburant 19 R glage 20 Positton correcte de d marrage et d marrage de la machine 21 Appareil de d marrage 21 Filtre air K65 24 Filtre air K1200 26 Carburateur 28 Bougie 29 inversion du bras decoupeur K65 30 Inversion du bras d coupeur K1200 31 Schema d entretien 33 Technique de travail 34 Outils 35
6. C Multiply by 007062 394 3 280 1 094 621 155 10 764 1 196 386 2 471 35 315 1 308 034 2 113 1 057 264 035 2 205 1 102 TM 5 4210 2228 14 amp P 1 PIN 061034 000 This fine document Was brought to you by me Liberated Manuals free army and government manuals Why do I do it I am tired of sleazy CD ROM sellers who take publicly available information slap watermarks and other junk on it and sell it Those masters of search engine manipulation make sure that their sites that sell free information come up first in search engines They did not create it They did not even scan it Why should they get your money Why are not letting you give those free manuals to your friends I am setting this document FREE This document was made by the US Government and is NOT protected by Copyright Feel free to share republish sell and so on I am not asking you for donations fees or handouts If you can please provide a link to liberatedmanuals com so that free manuals come up first in search engines A HREFzhttp www liberatedmanuals com Free Military and Government Manuals lt A gt Sincerely Igor Chudov http igor chudov com
7. 17 Operate the machine only in well ventila Always carry the machine with the engine stopped and the muffler away from your body Never operate a cutting machine that is damaged improperly adjusted or not completely and securely assembled Be sure that the disc stops moving when the throttle control trigger s released Always shut off the engine before setting the machine down Keep the handles dry clean and free of oil or fuel ted areas Failure to use the power cutter in a well ventilated area can lead to serious injury or death The cutter disc should be removed from the cutting machine when it Is transport ed or stored All service other than items listed in the machinebuilder s maintenance nstruc tions should be performed by competent service personnel Do not operate a cutting machine unless specifically trained to do so TM 5 4210 228 14 amp P 1 Sicherheitsma nahmen f r den Benutzer von Trenns gen 1 Die Trennsage nie benutzen wenn man mude ist Benutzen Sie Schuhe die einen sicheren Halt geben dicht anl egende Kleidung eine Schutzbrille Ohren und Kopt schutz und Schutzhandschuhe Seien Sie immer beim Auff llen des Kraftstoffes vorsichtig Tragen Sie die Maschine zu einem Platz der wenigstens 3 m von der Auftankstelle entfernt ist bevor Sie sie starten Erlauben Sie niemandem sich in der Nahe aufzuhalten wenn Sie die Ma schine starten oder w
8. 3 Open release valve A Fig 3 and force ram to fully retract by exerting strong steady pressure on cylinder Be sure to hold hose straight Fig 3 THIS IS VERY IMPORTANT as it allows oil pressure to force any air trapped in ram or hose back through pumping system eliminating air pockets TM 5 4210 228 14 amp P 1 4 Remove pump from vise and stand pump on tank end Fig 1 Remove hex filler screw assembly C allowing excess oil to expel through filler hole If oil will flow out filler hole unit is properly filled If oil does not flow out repeat step No 2 under filling instructions 5 Replace hex filler screw assembly securely with vent valve in pump position Turn release valve A to close position Operate pump with full stroke Ram should extend approximately A8 on first stroke If ram will not extend pump is air bound and it is necessary to repeat bleeding instructions Turn vent valve to full clockwise seal position when not in use BU0300 DIRECT ACTION JACK OIL INSPECTION FILLING AND BLEEDING INSTRUCTIONS 1 Place unit in vise after making certain that ram is fully retracted Clamp the jack in vise at the angle illustrated Fig 4 so that filler screw A is at highest level Be sure protector ring is threaded completely onto jack housing before securing jack in vise Engage jaws of vise on protector ring only and then exert only enough vise pressure to keep jack in upright position 2 Remove filler screw A with an All
9. H ll handtagen torra rena och fria fr n olja och bransle Anvand maskinen endast 1 utrymmen med god ventilation Forsummelse kan leda till allvarl g skada eller dod Kapskivan skall tagas av kapmaskinen under transport eller vid forvar ng All service utover de punkter som upp raknas 1 tillverkarens underh llsinstruk tioner skall utforas av kompetent ser vicepersonal Arbeta inte med kapmaskinen utan att forst ha genomg tt specialutbildning i dess handhavande TM 5 4210 228 14 amp P 1 Operator Safety Precautions 1 Never operate the machine when you are fatigued 2 Use safety footwear snug fitting cloth ing safety goggles and hearing and head protection devices and gloves 3 Always use caution when handling fuel Move the cutting machine at least 10 feet from the fueling point before starting engine 4 Donotallow other persons to be near the machine when starting or cutting Keep bystanders and animals out of the work area 5 Never start cutting until you have a clear work area and secure footing 6 Always hold the unt firmly with both hands when the engine is running Use a firm grip with thumbs and fingers en circling the handles 7 Keep all parts of your body away from the cutter disc when the engine is running 8 Never operate without the disc guard 9 Donotcock wedge or jam the disc in the cut Before starting the engine make sure that the disc is not contacting anything 11 12
10. These connectors enable you to use all of the tubing extensions at one time if needed for an extremely long span connectors have holes for inserting pins when tubing is used in pulling operations Use one connector between each two pieces of tubing BU 731 HEAVY DUTY COUPLING For use in making threaded connections Note BU 725 and BU 731 can be used to adapt to 114 Standard Pipe in emergencies 51 1 MALE ADAPTERS 3 to a kit Screws into Ham bottom and BU 238 for using Speedlok Tubing and Attachments SL 2 FEMALE ADAPTER Screws onto Ham Piston thus adapting it to Speedlok Tubing and Attachments BU 725 SHORT NIPPLE Screws into ram base for using threaded attachments SL 7 CONNECTING PINS 12 to a kit To be used in all pulling operctions using tubing Simply snap connectors into holes in tubing It is not necessary to use these pins in pushing or lifting hook ups RK 98 METAL BOX This durable all metal box is designed to conveniently hold the RK 4 Rescue Kit On Rescue Trucks Apparatus Cruisers etc Gray enamel finish Size 2234 12 14 82 RK 99 CANVAS CARRYING CASE Heavy canvas with three tie ropes Excep tionally useful for carrying necessary pieces over ladders underground etc The 10 Ton Hydraulic Jack is the Power Source of the P F Hydraulic Rescue Kit which enables an operator to work anywhere independent of all other power sources The Ram the working end of the Power
11. Valve leakage suspected Corroded damaged or jammed valve handwheel or pull lever Immovable jammed loose tap lightly to check or missing gauge pointer TM 5 4210 228 14 amp P 1 SERVICE AND REPAIR CORRECTIVE ACTION Disconnect pipe and fittings at dry chemical tank outlet and use plumbers drain auger to clear tube Use a mild abrasive scouring powder to clean plate If readability cannot be improved replace nameplate Remove nameplate and inspect area under plate If corroded see Extinguishing Agent Tank s Rust Spots Pits and Corrosion Deposits and take appropriate corrective action as surface condition would indicate or clean area repaint using a primer and finish coat if necessary and reaffix nameplate using a good grade of heatless adhesive Replace with correct nameplate see applica ble parts list Clean corroded areas with wire brush replac ing cylinder if there is any corrosion pene tration or repaint using a primer and finish coat Depressurize remove valve and destroy both internal and external threads on the cylinder to render the vessel unusable Remove loose paint with a wire brush and re paint using a primer and finish coat Clean threads with a stiff bristle brush small nicks burrs rough or feathered edges may be eliminated by careful filing If damaged worn or corroded severely the cylinder should be scrapped and replaced Apply soap solution over valve opening ar
12. o JOE ob 1 5 5 3 10 10 10 1 1 2 2 2 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 1 2 1 1 1 5 5 5 5 5 1 1 1 5 4 3 6 6 8 13 TM 5 4210 228 14 amp P 1 ANSUL ACTUATION PIPING ASSEMBLY 8 14 TM 5 4210 228 14 amp P 1 ANSUL ACTUATION PIPING ASSEMBLY DESCRIPTION QUANTITY PART NO Actuation Piping Assembly Actuator Pneumatic Valve Nameplate Nameplate Nameplate Elbow Street 1 8 x 900 Hose 15 1 2 Long Elbow 1 4 x 900 Nipple 1 4 x 7 8 Cross 1 4 Bushing Reducing 1 4 x 1 8 Valve Poppet 1 8 Pipe 1 4 x 12 1 4 Long Tee 1 4 Pipe 1 4 x 10 1 2 Long Valve Safety Relief 1 4 275 PSI Connection 1 4 Tube x 1 4 NPT Tube Copper PVC Covered 1 4 x 25 Grommet Hose 21 Long Grommet U Bolt 1 4 20 S S Lockwasher 1 4 S S Nut Hex 1 4 20 S S Screw Hex Head 1 4 20 x 1 2 Lg Nameplate Actuating Device Assembly L H Cartridge Shipping Assembly LT 5 L Dashboard Actuator Assembly Fitting 1 4 Tube x 1 8 NPT x 900 Nameplate Nameplate Operating Valve Check 1 4 Brass Coupling 1 4 Brass ch NN A0 N AO n PU 8 15 TM 5 4210 228 14 amp P 1 ANSUL HOSE REEL ASSEMBLY DESCRIPTION QUANTITY PART NO Hose Reel Assembly Hose Reel Sub Assembly Hose Reel Assembly Clamp Hose Screw Phillips Head 1 4 20NC x 3 4 Lg Lockwasher 1 4 Nut Hex 1 4 20NC Union Swivel Adapto
13. tre employ e Essence 1 Employer de l essence dite regular De l essence dite premium n est pas ne cessaire Huile 1 Afin d obtenir le meilleur rendement pos sible i faut employer de l huile Partner Le rapport de m lange est de 1 50 2 1 Wir empfehlen Mischungsver haltnis 1 50 2 95 2 Falls kein Partner l zur Verfugung steht darf auch ein anderes Zweitaktol von hoher Qualitat verwendet werden Das Mischungsverhaltnis betragt 1 25 4 95 3 Niemals Mehrbereichsol 10W 30 oder fur Viertaktmotoren verwenden Vor dem Einfullen mussen Benzin und OI sorgfaltig miteinander vermischt werden Zum Tanken stets den Motor abstellen 2 S lnesetrouve pas d huile Partner dispo nible on peut utiliser une autre huile de haute qualit pour moteurs deux temps Le rapport de m lange est de 1 25 4 3 Il ne faut jamais employer de l huile dite multigrade 10 W 30 ou une huile de stin e des moteurs 4 temps L essence et l huile doivent tre minutieuse ment m lang es avant que le remplissage soit effectu Le moteur doit toujours tre arret lorsqu on effectue le remplissage 19 Reglage A Stoppknapp Nar knappen trycks bak t stoppas motorn Knappen stannar detta lage och m ste terforas fore nasta start B Chokeknapp Kall motor startas med stangd choke knappen tryckt bak t Varm motor startas regel utan choke C Startgassparr Tryck in gasreglage
14. Either Turret Hose Reel Turret Hose Reel Ready Ready Ready Open Pull Pull Pull Control Trigger Valve Trigger Valve and and and and Aim Aim Aim Aim Nozzle Turret Nozzle Turret TM 5 4210 228 14 amp P 1 INTRODUCTION TRUCK EQUIPMENT AND ACCESSORIES Warning Light The light bar is mounted on the roof of the cab and includes a built in public address speaker The light can be operated by means of a separate switch on the dashboard instrument panel The switch contains a red indicator light which is activated when the warning light is in use Electronic Siren Public Address and Radio Amplifier System The system contains selector controls for siren public address or radio amplification through an external speaker mounted in the warning light bar assembly The amplifier its controls and the microphone are mounted in the cab in a location accessible to the driver or passenger The siren can be operated by either the floor mounted switch or the standard horn actuator Spotlights Two decklights are mounted at the rear of the truck on top of the service body Two spotlights are mounted on the side of the truck cab The rear lights are operated by a switch located at the bottom of each light The cab mounted lights can be operated from switch handle assemblies inside the truck cab Rescue Equipment A hydraulic rescue kit aircraft rescue crash tool kit and rescue saw are located in the service body compartments for easy access during
15. pas orient e vers la droite a alors que la vis de fixation du bras de d coupage b poss de un pas qui est orient vers la gauche 11 est possible de tourner le bras de d coupage de 180 de sorte que le disque d coupeur se trouve sur le c t oppos du bras Cela facilite le d coupage d obstacles verticaux tels que des parois ou autres objets similaires 31 TM 5 4210 228 14 amp P 1 Kaparmen lossas liknande satt som vid drivremsbyte se sid 16 Lossa aven ratten och skruven som h ller staget sprangskyddet 180 Montera drivrem men p motorn och darefter kaparmen s att skruven for staget passar in nedre h let 1 vevhuset Skifta skruvarna a och b Lagg remmen p framre remhjulet och spann ex centern Drag fast kaparmen och montera k porna The cutter arm is loosened in the same way when changing the drive belt see page 16 Loosen also the knurled knob and the screw taming the stay Turn the protective casing rough 180 Fit the drive belt on the engine d then on the cutter arm so that the screw the stay fits into the lower hole in the crankcase Interchange screws a and b Fit the belt on the front pulley and then tension e eccentric Tighten the cutter arm and fit the casings Der Trennarm wird ahnlich wie beim Wechsel des Kellriemens gelost siehe 16 Au erdem mussen Drehgriff und Schraube mit der die Strebe befestigt ist gelost wer den Den Sprengschutz um 180 drehen Keilriemen
16. 1 1 2 Male NPTF x 1 1 2 Female NPSM Swivel Union 58 3 GPM 60 0 Ft Ansul Fire Protection Wormald U S Inc 14035 2 Male NPTF x 2 Female NPSM Swivel Union 18 1 Lbs Sec 115Ft 17 Ft INTRODUCTION 10 11 12 13 TM 5 4210 228 14 amp P 1 TABLE OF SPECIFICATIONS CONT AFFF Agent Turret Manufacturer Part No Hose Connection Rate 167 GPM Effective Range Pattern Width Siren PA Control System Manufacturer Model Warning Light Manufacturer Model Rear Decklights Manufacturer Model Front Spotlight Manufacturer Model Rescue Saw Manufacturer Model Hydraulic Rescue Kit Manufacturer Model Capacity Ansul Fire Protection Wormald U S Inc 19444 2 Male NPTF x 25 Female NPSM Swivel Union 105 Ft 15 Ft Federal Sign and Signal Corporation PA 2100 With Microphone FN 900 Speaker TS 100 and ASI Switch Federal Sign and Signal Corporation Aero Dynic 24A Unity Manufacturing Company AG 6 Unity Manufacturing Company 225 Paratech Incorporated K 1200 H K Porter Inc PK4 10 Ton 14 15 16 Crash Rescue Kit Manufacturer Model Rescue Tool Manufacturer Model Floor Mounted Switch Manufacturer Part No TM 5 4210 228 14 amp P 1 INTRODUCTION TABLE OF SPECIFICATIONS CONT Sierra Company CRK5 SIERRA Crash Rescue Kit Hurst Performance Inc Safety Products Division 3620025 Gasoline Engine Hydraulic Powered C E Niehoff Co
17. 23 Examine hose for abrasion cracks or cuts ES r p NS ne gt 24 Make certain nose couplings are tight and inspect for corrosion or mechanical damage 25 Examine nozzle opening s for obstruction 26 Squeeze nozzle triggers to check for free movement NOTE Make certain nozzle triggers are forward in the CLOSED position 27 Make certain cartridge is fully threaded into dashboard actuator TM 5 4210 228 14 amp P 1 MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS TM 5 4210 228 14 amp 1 MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS 28 Pull ring pin push button or lever on actuator serves as functional test of valve actuators and cylinder valves IMPORTANT The actuator must be operated at every maintenance examination to verify system operation Completion of all maintenance steps is vital to assure that the system will operate effectively and safely NOTE Alternate use of the remote and dashboard actuators is recommended 29 Check nitrogen cylinders all valves should be open 30 Swing turret horizontally and vertically to check for free movement 31 Quickly open and close each turret individually to check valve operation NOTE Escaping gas serves to confirm line is unobstructed and that valve and valve controls are operable 32 Quickly open and close each hand line nozzle individually to check valve operation NOTE Escaping gas serves to confirm lines are unobstructed and valves are operab
18. ANSUL AFFF CONCENTRATE Ei 5 Use a soft cloth or soft tissue moisten one end with lukewarm water for wiping the prism clean and dry If the prism surface or cover plate is not well cleaned before the next sample is loaded an erroneous or fuzzy reading may result CAUTION Do not immerse the eyepiece of the black focusing ring in water Never use gritty cleaning compounds to clean the prism and never expose the instrument to temperatures above 150 F 6 If the Quality of Sample and the Refractive Index Tests are okay no further tests are needed However questionable results on either test indicate that the concentrate may not be acceptable lf the concentrate fails either of the above two tests it is necessary to measure the film formation sealability and expansion ratio as described in the following sections If the concentrate passes these additional tests it is acceptable and need not be replaced Measurement of Film Formation and Sealablity Quality is not necessary to perform this test unless irregularities are encountered in the Quality of Sample or Measurement of Concentration Tests 1 You will need an automatic blender for use as a test foam maker at 70 50 F an 80 mesh concial screen of corrosion resisting steel 5 inches in height by 43 4 inches in diameter a corrosion resisting 1000 ml graduated measure 41 2 inches in diameter 5 inches deep with small metal clips fitted at the top edge to re
19. ORIZED SERVICE STATION IMPORTANT Warranty of this P Fe Hydraulic Unit will be voided unless the following instructions are strictly adhered to 1 Do not take unit apart 2 Use nothing but P F Hydraulic Fluid in this unit Under no circumstances should brake fluid anti freeze or crank case oil be used This could cause irreparable damage to internal mechanism 3 Be sure to use clean oil can when filling unit with Hydraulic Fluid 4 Do not allow abrasives or other foreign matter to get into Hydraulic Fluid 5 Do not fill unit beyond its oil level See filling instructions in side this folder With careful attention to the above requirements your Hy draulic Unit should remain in excellent working condition and give long trouble free performance EI Service Service on P F Hydraulic Units is available nationwide Keep the enclosed list of P F Service Stations so you can contact the one nearest you for expert maintenance or repairs if necessary A Product of H K PORTER INC SOMERVILLE MASSACHUSETTS 02143 Form No 10119 Printed in U S A N Nervice Whenever service is required return P F unit to the jobber from whom you purchased it or to your nearest P F Au thorized Service Station Always use Hydraulic Fluid for economy and smooth efficient operation of quality hydraulic jacks and rams Special detergents prevent rust HQ0001 Ga NYDRAULIC FL
20. Swing close the cover plate over the measuring prism without delay to assure minimum evaporation CAUTION Take care to avoid lifting the cover plate before the reading is made Care must be taken to avoid air bubbles when placing sample on the refractometer prism Document the condition of the samples regardless of the test results This procedure is essentially identical to that given in Instructions for Use and Care of the AO TS Meter and Concentrimeter by the American Optical Corporation Scientific Instrument Division Buffalo New York 14215 The TS Meter Is available from scientific supply companies such as Rascher Betzold or Curtin Scientific at a cost of about 500 TM 5 4210 228 14 amp P 1 TEST PROCEDURES PREMIXED ANSUL AFFF 5 min To hold the instrument for reading place middle finger on nameplate and press the plastic cover gently but firmly to spread a minimal volume of sample in a thin even layer over the prism Expose it to an illuminating source such as a fluorescent or incandescent lamp or full sunlight NOTE To obtain the optimum contrast between light and dark boundary the instrument may have to be properly tilted with respect to the lamp Bring the scale seen in the eyepiece into best focus by rotation of the eyepiece NOTE This setting need not be changed as long as the same individual continues to use the instrument Make the reading on the appropriate scale at the point where the dividing lin
21. Tekniska data Motor luftkyld 2 takts cylindervolym T ndsystem transistortandsystem tandst ft elektrodavst nd Forgasare varvtalsreglerad regleromr de Br nsle oljeinblandning med PARTNER olja tankvolym KAPUTRUSTNING Kapskiva 12 K65 12 K1200 12 K1200 14 K1200 Technical data Engine air cooled two stroke capacity ignition system transistor ignition system spark plug electrode spark gap Carburetor speed governor range of regulations Fuel mixture ratio with PARTNER oil tank capacity CUTTING EQUIPMENT Cutter disc 12 K65 12 K1200 12 K1200 14 K1200 K65 65 cm PARTNER IGNITRON Bosch WKA 225 T3 0 5 mm Tillotson HS 175 A 9 600 400 4 1 25 2 150 0 75 K65 65cc PARTNER IGNITRON Bosch WKA 225 T3 0 5 mm 020 Tillotson HS 175 A 9 600 400 4 9c 125 2 1 50 0751 132 Imp pints 159 US pints TM 5 4210 228 14 amp P 1 K1200 100 cm PARTNER IGNITRON Bosch WKA 225 T6 0 8 mm Tillotson HS 175 A 9 600 400 4 1 25 2 1 50 101 Max periferihastighet 80 m s 80 m s 100 m s 100 m s K1200 100cc PARTNER IGNITRON Bosch WKA 225 T6 08 mm 031 Tillitson HS 175 A 9 600 400 4 1 25 2 150 101 1 76 Imp pints 2 12 US pints Max peripherical speed 80 m s 80 m s 100 m s 100 m s Technische Daten Motor Zweitaktmotor mit Luftkuhlung Hubraum Z ndanlage Transistorzu
22. concentrate If the concentrate successfully passes these two tests it is acceptable Should the sample fail either of these two test Ansul then recommends that the film formation sealability and expansion ratio be measured to ensure he concentrate is acceptable Observe all instructions carefully when performing inspections Ansul AFFF Premix Solution Test Procedures Found In Pages 6 10 As with the concentrate the premix solution should be stored at temperatures of 350 F 1 7 C or 120 F 48 9 C when the premix solution is originally formulated a sample of the water should be taken and observed for residue Let the water stand in its container for 5 minutes and then record the amount and appearance of any residue on the inspection sheet to avoid unnecessary concern during future premix inspections You should also measure and record the initial refractive index of the premix solution as described on Page 8 of this manual Ansul recommends that the Ansul AFFF premix be tested annually or more frequently if adverse storage conditions exist These tests consist of observing the appearance and measuring the concentration seal ability and expansion ratio of the premix Observe all instructions carefully when performing the tests Ansul recommends that Ansul AFFF concentrate be inspected every five years Should the quality of the Ansul AFFF concentrate be questioned for any reason improper mixing sediment improper storage
23. montage K1200 D visser les trois vis qui maintiennent le couvercle de cylindre En lever ensuite le couvercle de cylindre ainsi que le filtre air D monter la bougie l aide de la cl tube qu fait partie du jeu d outils Kaparm K65 Det finns mojlighet att vanda kaparmen 180 s att kapskivan kommer p armens motsatta sida Detta underlattar kapning nara vertikala hinder s som vaggar och liknande Kaparmen sprangskyddet och drivremmen lossas samma satt som vid drivremsbyte sesid 15 Cutting arm K65 It is possible to turn the cutting arm 180 so that the cutter disc is positioned on the opposite side of the arm This facilitates cutting close to vertical obstacles such as walls etc The cutting arm the safety casing and the drive belt are loosened in the same way as when changing the drive belt see page 15 Trennarm K65 Man kann den Trennarm um 180 drehen so da die Trennscheibe an der entgegenge setzten Seite des Arms zu liegen kommt Da durch werden Trenn und Schneidarbeiten an senkrechten Hindernissen z B an Wan den erleichtert Trennarm Sprengschutz und Antriebsrie men werden auf die gleiche Art gelost wie beim Riemenwechse Siehe Seite 15 Bras de d coupage K65 est possible de tourner le bras de d cou page de 180 de sorte que le disque d cou peur se trouve sur le c t oppos du bras Cela facilite le d coupage d obstacles verti caux tels que des parois ou autres objets s
24. und die Niedertourenschraube L sind je ca 34 Umdrehung geoffnet Die Leerlaufschraube ist 2 Umdrehung nach Beruhrung mit dem Gasarm einzuschrauben Wenn der Motor warmgelaufen ist kann der Vergaser nachgestellt werden Die Nieder tourenschraube L ist so einzustellen da der Motor im Leerlauf nicht stehenbleibt Die Hochtourenschraube H ist so einzustellen da der Motor be voller Gaszufuhr gut durchdreht Danach ist die Schraube 4 Um drehung zu offnen Der Vergaser ist mit einem Uberdrehschutz versehen der zu hohe Motordrehzahlen verhindert die zu einer zu hohen Geschwindigkeit der Trenn scheibe fuhren konnten Vollgas und unbelasteter Trennscheibe sind deutliche Veranderungen der Drehzahl zu horen Dies ist normal und bedeutet nur da der Uber drehschutz in Funktion tritt Die Leerlauf schraube t ist so einzustellen da der Motor im Leerlauf lauft ohne da sich die Scheibe dreht Carburateur de base du carburateur est effectu en usine Cela signifie environ de tour d ouverture sur l aiguille de haut r gime H et l aiguille de bas regime L La vis de ralenti t est viss e d environ 2 tour apres r glage du bras d acc l ration Lorsque le moteur est chaud le carburateur peut faire l objet d un ajustage d appoint La vis de bas r gime L est regl e de sorte que le moteur ne s arr te pas lorsqu il tourne au ralenti La vis de haut r gime H est r gl e afin que le moteur
25. 2 13NC P PO O gt gt gt N 8 25 TM 5 4210 228 14 amp P 1 ANSUL DASHBOARD ACTUATOR ASSEMBLY DESCRIPTION QUANTITY PART NO 1 1 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Actuator Dashboard Assembly Knob Push Screw Machine Plate Face Assembly Plate Face Rivet Chain Ring Pin Pin Ring Actuator Remote Assembly Body Actuator Bushing U Cup Guide Pin Ring Retaining Gasket Pin Puncture Assembly Pin Puncture Pin Spring Cartridge Nitrogen Shipping Assembly Cartridge LT 5 L Cap Safety Shipping Seal Visual Inspection Not Shown OO JO Oo ov NH Not included with actuator assembly order separately 8 26 TM 5 4210 228 14 amp P 1 SECTION 9 NUMERICAL INDEX ANSUL PAGE FIG FSCM VENDOR PART NO NO NO PART NO S 27762 S 27763 23 S 27763 8 18 S 27770 8 S 27782 3 S 27783 8 18 2 S 28259 8 3 13 S 29551 8 S 50553 1 S 52139 4 S 52262 8 6 58 S 52263 8 6 60 S 52264 84 S 52265 8 6 62 S 52266 8 1 3 S 52267 8 1 4 S 52268 8 6 77 52269 25 52270 8 15 2 52316 8 6 56 S 52527 7 S 52527 S 52528 2 S 52529 8 3 12 S 52530 S 52531 6 S 52534 11 S 52535 15 S 52535 S 52536 9 S 52537 10 S 52538 2 S 52538 S 52539 14 S 52539 S 52540 4 S 52541 5 S 52789 6 S 52790 3 S 52797 S 52797 S 52798 E S 52798 S 52806 40 S 52808 1 S 52854
26. 228 14 amp P 1 RECHARGE INSTRUCTIONS e Thread safety plug fully into cylinder valve outlet CAUTION Use of plug is vital to your safety If valve is accidentally operated velocity of unrestricted escaping gas is forceful enough to cause injury especially about the face and head f Secure oylinder shipping cap NOTE Safety shipping cap must always be in place when removing or installing cylinder g Remove cylinder retaining bracket and slide cylinder out 33 Install fully charged cylinder s NOTE Read cylinder gauge before installation pointer should be in BLACK operating range 4 11 TM 5 4210 228 14 amp P 1 RECHARGE INSTRUCTIONS 34 Secure cylinder retaining bracket s 35 Remove safety shipping cap s from cylinder s Retain cap s for future use WARNING MAKE CERTAIN SAFETY PLUG IS IN PLACE IN CYLINDER VALVE OUTLET BEFORE COMPLETING THE FOLLOWING STEPS 36 Install pneumatic valve actuator s a Extend pneumatic valve actuator rod fully and slide actuator arm on cross shaft engaging pin in hole on Quick Opening lever NOTE Refer to Appendix A4 for additional detail b Insert crescent ring into groove on cross shaft 4 12 37 38 c Insert anchor stud through valve body and actuator pivot member CAUTION The Quick Opening lever may be moved slightly forward approximately 1 4 inch 6 4 mm to permit installation of the anchor stud FORWARD MOVEMENT IN EXCESS OF 1 4 IN
27. 238 into bottom of Ram and add Male Adapter SL 1 to Pull Arm Assembly Desired working head should be attached to Ram Piston BEFORE tubing of desired length is i passed through Pull Guide BU 775 to connect with Pull Arm Assem bly BU 238 Attach choice of Flat Push Plate BU 580 Cleated Push Plate BU 581 or Rubber Anchor BU 700 to head of Ham Piston Additional Tubing may be added to extend pressing operation to a distance of 527 Insert Connecting Pins SL 7 Caution Connecting Pins must always be used in pressing operations Any additional required lengths of tubing may be added to tubing in Pull Arm Guide BU 775 or to Ram Piston but pins must be inserted in holes between each two lengths of Tubing and SL 1 Adapters Finish off with the Male Adapter 51 1 and attach either Long Spreading Toe BU 912 or Jack Piston Spreading Toe BU 905 18 TM 5 4210 228 14 amp P 1 P F RESCUE KITS OFFER QUICK and EASY HOOK UPS to CARE OF EVERY ACCIDENT LIFTING HOLDING Victim trapped under truck Neces Victim buried under debris of fallen sary to lift vehicle in order to free building Heavy wall has been lifiad legs See hook up on Page 12 and is now being held in place to permit rescue workers to recover victim See hook up on Pages 13 14 15 PUSHING SPREADING Victim wedged between fallen tree Victim caught in elevator is released and building Tree is beinq pushed by moving elevator back in we
28. 4 IMPORTANT If the systems cannot be actuated by use of the cartridge operated actuator s a Pull the Quick Opening operating levers on all cylinders OR b Turn handwheels on all nitrogen cylinders counterclockwise to full OPEN position SECTION 4 To prepare the fire suppressing securing system for service after use For continued protection the system must be recharged immediately after use DRY CHEMICAL TANK 1 Pull ring pin and close BLACK Dry Chemical Valve 2 Pull ring pin and close RED Tank Valve 3 Pull ring pin and open GREEN Vent Valve AFFF SOLUTION TANK 4 Pull ring pin and close BLACK AFFF valve TM 5 4210 228 14 amp P 1 RECHARGE INSTRUCTIONS TM 5 4210 228 14 amp P 1 RECHARGE INSTRUCTIONS SECTION 4 5 Pull ring pin and open BLUE Hose Clean Out Valve 6 Open dry chemical and AFFF turret nozzles individually until streams are clear then close NOTE Do not relieve all pressure through turret 7 Open dry chemical handline nozzle to clear hose line and to relieve all pressure from dry chemical tank Open AFFF handline nozzle until stream is clear then close NOTE Make sure all hose is off hose reel 8 Close cylinder valves a Push GREEN Pressure Relief Valve Button to relieve pressure in cylinder actuation manifold TM 5 4210 228 14 amp P 1 RECHARGE INSTRUCTIONS b Turn handwheel on cylinder counterclockwise to full OPEN position c Push Quick Opening lev
29. 7 8 high retracted which can be substituted for regular ram when working in cramped quarters Takes all extensions and attachments of regular ram Fourton capacity Ram travel of 3 4 Connector is offset for space saving and ease of attaching when ram is on flat surface Note RAM SHOULD NEVER BE DISCONNECTED WHILE UNDER LOAD BU 190 BITE TITE CLAMPS For use with Pull Chain in pulling operations Serrated jaws grip even the thinnest metal without slipping and will not pull off during operations Use 34 wrench for tightening bolts for positive holding of clamps See page 9 for detailed hook up instructions TM 5 4210 228 14 amp P 1 ATTACHMENTS BU 187 CHAIN PULL COLLAR Screws on ram cylinder for use with chain in pulling operations See pages 10 and 11 for hookup attachments substituting BU 1 87 for BUR 287 BU 186 CHAIN For use with Chain Pull Kit Two 6 long chains enable operator to make any hook up required in pulling operations Faster and more flexible tha tubing hook ups See pages 10 and 11 for hook up attachments substituting BU 186 Chains for BU911 Chains TUBE EXTENSIONS P F EZ E ON Tubing and Attachments enables operator to make lightning fast assemblies Just snap pieces and attachments together to get correct length Set contains 2 SM 50 20 Tubes 1 SM 58 8 Tube 1 SM 52 12 Tube 1 SM 55 5 Tube 2 SM 53 3 Tubes See pages 6 and 7 for hook up attachments With the RK 1 Kit you can make practically
30. Company 515 S Hackberry at E Houston St San Antonio King s Hyd Service 3501 New Boston Rd Texarkana UTAH Gustin Hydraulics 151 W Commonwealth Salt Lake City VIRGINIA Petroleum Engineering Company 5520 Virginia Beach Bivd Norfolk Hydraulic Service Co 3104 Victory Blvd Portsmouth Moore s Jack amp Equip Service 2406 N Lombardy Richmond D amp S Repair Service Inc 20 Dove St Alexandria WEST VIRGINIA CCC Hydraulic Service 4325 Washington St W Charleston WASHINGTON The Jack Shop 409 Codar Street Seattle Olson s Parts amp Supplies Co 2128 E Sprague Ave Spokane WISCONSIN Hader Industries 2100 So Calhoun Rd New Berlin Mac s Hydraulic Parts amp Service 525 S Broadway Green Bay CANADA Alberta Northland Air Hydraulics 6210 88th St Edmonton British Columbia Hyd Service amp Equip 102 E 2nd Avenue Vancouver Ontario Equipment Rebuilders Ltd 64 Colville Road Toronto Quebec Anjou Warehouse Ltd 8551 Parkway Blvd Montreal Uptown Auto Jack Repair 464 St Hubert St PontViau Laval Prichard Eng Co Ltd 111 Bannister Winnipeg Manitoba BODY REPAIR TOOLS and EQUIPMENT Automotive Division of H K PORTER INC Somerville Mass 02143 Also makers of Metal Cutters amp Pruning Tools Printed in U S A 1974 Form 10120 TM 5 4210 228 14 amp P 1 Caufion READ INSTRUCTIONS BEFORE USING THIS HYDRAULIC U
31. No 1 SL0016 1 SL0020 1 RK0098 1 RK0099 Manufacturer H K Porter Inc TM 5 4210 228 14 amp P 1 HYDRAULIC RESCUE KIT MODEL RK 4 Description 16 extension tube 20 extension tube Steel carrying case Canvas carrying case Somerville Massachusetts 02143 TM 5 4210 228 14 amp P 1 PARATECH INCORPORATED Rescue Saw K 1 200 Ansul Part No S27770 A9 TM 5 4210 228 14 amp P 1 PRRTNER K65 K1200 INSTRUKTIONSBOK INSTRUCTION BOOK BETRIEBSANLEITUNG MANUEL D ENTRETIEN F rord For att Din kapmaskin skall bl den goda PARTNER Du med all ratt vantar Dig r der vi Dig att agna n gra minuter t att lasa genom denna bok som ar avsedd att underlatta en riktig skotsel av maskinen samt visa hur man utfor nodvandiga kontroller och underh ils arbeten Kapmaskinen ar ett arbetsverktyg med hog skarkapacitet som ar forsedd med sakerhets detaljer for att arbetet s sakert som mojl gt Med dessa ur funktion eller vid vards los eller felaktig anvandning kan maskinen orsaka skador foraren eller personer i omedelbar narhet av skarande maskin Las darfor noga genom sakerhetsforeskrifterna pa sidan 6 En kapmaskin far under inga omstandig heter ndras fran sin ursprungliga konstruk tion annat n med fabrikens skriftliga med givande auktoriserade andringar kan medf ra att s kerheten ventyras Fabriken forbeh ller sig ratten att foretaga andringar uta
32. P P 2 3 AUDIO NOTE 14 OVDC supply voltage Radio potentiometer and GAIN control at maximum Frequency 300 to 10 000HZ Harmonic Distortion 1096 max at all power levels En from 5 to 70 watts frequency EE EAE AEREA EEE E E E E ENR response 3dB Input Impedance Radio 3 6K ohms lee Carbon Mic 3 6K ohms E eege eege Magnetic Mic 10K ohms Signal input voltage required Io Radio 0 45 Vrms obtaln 20 Vrms across a b b tdi Carbon Mic 0 165 Vrms Oh Oa Magnetic Mic 0 025 Vrms 2 4 ACCESSORIES OPTIONAL TM 5 4210 228 14 amp P 1 Model MNCT Transistorized Noise Canceling Microphone Model FN900 Federal Model MNCT Microphone Adapter Module Model FN901 Federal Model MNC or MR Microphone Adapter Module Model FN902 Federal Model VPII Microphone Adapter Module Model FN903 Motorola Microphone Adapter Module Model FN904 Motorola Micor Microphone Adapter Module Model FN905 RCA Microphone Adapter Module Model FN906 RCA 500 Microphone Adapter Module Model FN907 GE Microphone Adapter Module Model FN908 GE Master It Microphone Adapter Module Model FN909 GE TPL Microphone Adapter Module Model FN910 Federal Duty Patrol Microphone Adapter Module Model FN91 1 Aerotron MPAC 6 7 or 8 Adapter Module Model FN912 RF Communications Model RF 498 Adapter Module Model FN913 Motorola Conv
33. Potentiometer 10K Ohm Capacitor 500 UF 15V electrolytic Capaciter 001UF 100V disc Capaciter 005 100V disc Diode 368AR Transistor NPN Silicon 2N5885 Transformer Output Switch Slide DPDT Fuse 20 Ampere 3AG Connector 8 contact Cinch Jones P308 AB Connector 12 contact Molex 03 06 212 Fuseholder 342002 Knob Control Knob GAIN Connector PC Board ACCESSORY KIT Description Straight Connector Two Collar N 35 1 4 20 x 3 8 Hex Head Screw 1 4 20 x 1 2 Hex Had Screw 1 4 20 Hex Nut Split Lockwasher 1 4 8A x 1 2 Phillips Pan Head Thread Forming Screw Circuit Breaker 12V 50 Amp Item sheet Accessory Kit Complete MISCELLANEOUS PARTS Assembly Housing Bracket Mounting LED CIRCUIT BOARD PARTS LIST Description Resistor 470 Ohm FC 10 1 4 Watt Resistor 47 Ohm FC 10 1 4 Watt Pilot Light LED Green Pilot Light LED Red Lamp Clear 14V CM 382 Switch Rotary LED Circuit Board without parts LED Circuit Board with parts installed OPTION F ALTERNATING FLASHER PARTS LIST Resistor 4 7K Ohm FC 1095 1 4 Watt Resistor 43K Ohm FC 5 1 4 Watt Resistor 100K Ohm FC 5 1 4 Watt Resistor 100 Ohm FC 10 1 4 Watt Resistor 2 2K Ohm FC 10 1 4 Watt Resistor 10K Ohm FC 1096 1 4 Watt Capacitor 0 01 UF 25V Disc Capacitor 4 7 UF 15V Tantalum Capacitor 0 001UF 500V Disc Integrated Circuit LM555C Translator PNP T1S93 Trans
34. RADIO INPUT MODULE ISOLATION TRANSFORMER CONTROL OSCILLATOR 43010 ICIOI 16102 106 through CRIO4 and R106 until it reaches IC102 s threshold voltage approximately 6 9 volts When the voltage on C106 and IC102 6 reaches approximately 6 9 volts IC102 changes states and C106 discharges through R126 R127 and R128 When the voltage on C106 reaches the trigger voltage of 102 approximately 3 5V IC102 again changes states and the cycle repeats The WAIL control voltage at IC102 6 is then applied to Emitter Follower Q101 and to the Scaling Amplifier IC103B The Scaling Amplifier expands scales and inverts the control voltage waveform at the emitter of Q101 to the level necessary to control the Voltage Controlled Oscillator VCO without significantly affecting the shape of waveform The gain of IC103B is determined by R113 and R116 The scaled control voltage waveform at IC103B 1 is coupled through CR108 to the VCO Control Point 1C104 5 vco CONTROL ICI03A VOLTAGE CONTROLLED OSCILLATOR EMITTER 0104 FOLLOWER AND SCALING AMPLIFIER 0101 ICIO3B 2 CIRCUIT ICIOSA PREAMPLIFIER ICIO7 DRIVER AMPLIFIER Q108 0109 OUTPUT AMPLIFIER 0301 0302 29041019 TO SPEAKERS P301 5 6 Figure 5 1 Siren Module Functional Block Diagram The output signal from the Voltage Controlled Oscillator 104 is a series of pulses whose frequency is determined by R119 R120 C105 and the control voltage at the V
35. Unit transmits the 10 tons of hydraulic pressure through hundreds of different and varied hook ups for pulling pushing lifting spreading and pressing operations The Ram in its basic form with Ram Cap BU 575 and Ham Base BU 586 for use in restricted spaces gt BU 586 i SL 9 El d TUBING t To attach tubing to Ram Piston screw Fe male Adapter SL 2 to Ram Piston Tubing slips on male end of Adapter To connect various lengths of Tubing use one of the Tubing Con nectors SL 9 between each two lengths of tubing TUBING For attachments with female threads such as Flat Push Plate BU 580 Cleated Push Plate BU 581 of Rubber Anchor BU 700 screw Short Nipple BU 725 into bottom of Ram and then use desired at tachment BU 700 To attach tubing to bot tom of Ram screw Male Adapter SL 1 into bot tom of Ham and slip on Tubing SL 1 TUBING When Tubing is hooked up for pulling opera align holes in Tubing with Adapters and insert Connecting tions Pins SL 7 TUBING ic TM 5 4210 228 14 amp P 1 gt 57 TM 5 4210 228 14 amp P 1 HOW TO HOOK UP ATTACHAAENTS SPREADER RAM E POSITION d RING APPROX INCH Remove Ram Protec After is tor Ring from top of ram Extend ram pis ton approximately 1
36. Valve OPEN 40 Insert ring pin s through handle s in bracket s and seal with visual inspection seal s Ansul Part No 15999 41 Secure AFFF solution tank fill cap hand tighten 42 Re read cylinder gauge s Note pressure rechecking ambient temperature and refer to Temperature Correction Chart in Appendix A 3 Replace cylinder s if below minimum pressure 6 13 TM 5 4210 228 14 amp 1 MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS 43 Seal handwheel s and operating lever s with visual inspection seals Ansul Part No 197 NOTE Should cylinder replacement be required refer to Recharge Section Pages 41 0 through 414 Steps 32 through 39 for correct procedures 44 Make certain both turret valve operating controls are in the closed position 45 Rewind hose on reel NOTE Do not lock hose reel 46 Secure nozzle assembly on holder and insert ring pin NOTE Make certain nozzle trigger s are forward in the CLOSED position 6 14 47 Oil hose reel inlet body bearing s 48 Grease hose reel pinion bearing s 49 Replace cartridge in dashboard actuator if used a Pull out dashboard actuator button and insert ring pin to assure safe cartridge installation b Remove spent cartridge 6 15 TM 5 4210 228 14 amp P 1 MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS ha TM 5 4210 228 14 amp 1 MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS c Remove safety shipping cap from replacement cartridge Weigh cartridge Replace if weigh
37. a main filter 2 and a spill filter 3 The spill filter may only be replaced by an authorized workshop The pre filter can be changed without using any tools and is easy to clean It protects the main filter from becoming blocked too quickly Luftfilter K1200 Das Filtersystem besteht aus Vorfilter 1 Hauptfilter 2 und Leckfilter 3 Das Leck filter sollte nur in einer Vertragswerkstatt ausgewechselt werden Das Vorfilter kann ohne Werkzeug ausge wechselt werden und la t sich leicht reini gen Esschutzt das Hauptfilter vor zu schnel ler Verstopfung Filtre air K1200 Le syst me de filtrage se compose d un pr filtre 1 d un filtre principal 2 et d un filtre de trop plein 3 Le filtre de trop plein ne doit tre remplac que dans un atelier auto rise Le prefiltre peut tre remplac sans outils Il est facile nettoyer emp che le filtre principal de se colmater trop rapidement 26 TM 5 4210 228 14 amp P 1 Forfiltret skall dragas av och skakas rent vid varje tankning Det skall tvattas ordentligt el ler bytas efter ca 30 kortimmar stalmaterial och efter ca 20 kortimmar betong eller l k nande material som framkallar kraftig dammbildning The pre filter must be pulled off and shaken clean in connection with every tankning operation The pre filter should be thoroughly washed or replaced after 30 hours of operation in steel material or after 20 hours of operation in concrete or similar materia
38. all of the pushing and lifting hook up attachments shown on pages 12 13 14 and 15 and with the Chain Pull Kit you will be able to accomplish the pulling operation described on page 16 UNCONDITIONALLY GUARANTEED All component parts of the P F RK 1 Hydraulic Rescue Kit except Hose and Chain are guaranteed against defects in materials and workmanship H K PORTER INC 902 PRINTED IN U S A 3 75 AUTOMOTIVE DIVISION OF H K PORTER INC Somerville Mass U S A 02143 TM 5 4210 228 14 amp P 1 OPERATION and MAINTENANCE No A128 PF H K PORTER INC SOMERVILLE MASSACHUSETTS 02143 TM 5 4210 228 14 amp P 1 A Message from Edward S Sparky Leonard Retired Believe me You can free trapped victims FASTER with this P F Hydraulic Rescue Kit and when Mr Leonard says Faster he speaks with authority His 32 years experience with the Boston Fire Department Rescue Squad puts him in a position to know that speed is the prime necessity in any phase of rescue work The P F Hydraulic Rescue Kit contains attachments that will take care of just about EVERY emergency More than three years of actual at the scene use proves this fact It is a practical working Kit simple and easy to operate compact yet complete It can be taken anywhere a man can go as it is easily portable It operates independently of outside power sources The 10 ton Hydraulic Jack produces all the power necessary to meet every resc
39. and screw Spreader BU 750 on to Ram Cylinder TUBING Spreader screwed on to Ram Cylinder loosen Thumb Screw on Spreader and jack out Ram Piston until it seats in socket of Spreader Tighten Thumb Screw on Spreader so that Spreader will retract when pressure is re leased Be sure to loosen thumb screw be fore removing Spreader from Ram When it is necessary to use spreader beyond arm s length or in a limited working area screw SL 1 into bottom of Ram and attach lengths of Speedlok Tubing to get desired reach Insert SL 7 Pins in Tubing holes to prevent unit from becoming dis connected while in use TM 5 4210 228 14 amp P 1 HOW TO HOOK UP ATTACHMENTS ASSEMBLING BITE TITE CLAMPS Put jaws A and B of Bite Insert Bolt C Longest Bolt Insert Bolt D in lower hole Tite Clamps BU 190 to in top hole and screw in Clamp B and turn five gether as shown above into jaws until Bolt is in times position shown above Insert Clamp Link E To attach Clamp to work loosen Bolt For working around on Bolt D and then C to provide sufficient opening for channels or raised holding jaws together work to fit between jaws Screw in edges reverse Jaw A aw up Bolt C first Bolt C until Clamp is tight CAUTION shown above and Ad then Bolt D Bolt D must remain loose After Bolt C proceed as above is tight then screw in Bolt D to lock clamp on work Jaws of clamps s
40. coupled through T301 and P301 5 and 6 to the siren speaker s The HI LO switch SW302 is set to when a 200 watt speaker 100 watt speakers are connected to the siren SW302 is set to LO when 58 watt speakers are used 5 6 PUSH TO TALK OVERRIDE When the siren and the two way radio each have separate microphones the siren is set for PA override operation The PA override feature allows the siren operator to use the siren as a public address amplifier when the SELECTOR switch is set to any position except RADIO When the operator depresses the microphone push to talk switch the Push To Talk Line is grounded This ground potential is applied through SW301 to IC301A and through Q101 to IC103B In addition the ground potential is also applied to the Timing Capacitor C106 preventing it from alternately charging and discharging As a result siren tone generation ceases allowing microphone audio to be amplified by the Preamplifier and Amplifier stages 5 7 ALTERNATING FLASHER The optional Alternating Flasher is located on a printed circuit board in the Control Module The schematic diagram of this circuit is shown in figure 6 12 The Alternating Flasher is basically an unstable multivibrator that operates at a nominal rate of 90 cycles per minute TM 5 4210 228 14 amp P 1 SECTION VI SERVICE AND MAINTENANCE 6 1 GENERAL Most of the electronic component parts used in the PA2100 are standard items that are avail
41. crite de l usine Les modifica tions qui n ont pas t autoris es peuvent risquer la s curit Nous nous r servons le droit de faire sans avis pr alable toutes les modifications que nous pourrions juger n cessaires AB PARTN R Inneh llsf rteckning TM 5 4210 228 14 amp P 1 se s d Tekniska data 2 Staristallning och start av s gen 21 Identifiering 4 Startapparat 21 Skyddsforeskrifter amp Luftfilter K65 24 Montering av kaparm K1200 10 Luftfilter K1200 26 Kapskivor 12 Forgasare 28 Drivrem K65 14 Tandstift 29 Drivrem K1200 16 X Vandning av kaparm K65 30 Sprangskydd 18 Vandn ng av kaparm K1200 31 Bransietank 18 Underhalisschema 32 Bransleblandning 18 Arbetsteknik 34 Reglage 20 Verktyg 35 Contents See page Technical data Identification Safety Fitting the cutter arm K1200 Cutter Vee belt 65 Vee belt 1200 Guard 18 Turning cutter arm K65 F el tati etri ictor tar eren Fuel mixture ptc decente aa 5 o A Correct starting position starting of the saw Starter Unit Pur tilter
42. cylinder casing together with he air filter Loosen the have the correct heat range Check and if necessary adjust the electrode spark gap As a rule the spark plug should be changed every second month Removing the spark plug K65 Lift off the spark plug protector and then loosen the spark plug by using the socket wrench in the tool kit Z ndkerze Damit die Zundkerze einwandfrei funktionie ren kann mu sie in gutem Zustand erhalten werden und vorschriftsmassigen Warmewert haben Der Elektrodenabstand mu kontrolliert und eingestellt werden Meistens mu die Zundkerze alle Zwei Mona te ausgewechselt werden Ausbau K65 Zundkerzenschutz abheben und Zundkerze mit dem im Werkzeugsatz enthaltenen Steckschlussel losen Bougie La bougte doit tre maintenue en bonne condition et avoir le degr de chaleur requis pour que le moteur puisse fonctionner sans perturbations Contr ler et ventuellement ajuster l cartement des lectrodes En r gle generale l faut remplacer la bougie tous les deux mois D montage K65 Enlever la protection de bougie et d monter la bougie l aide de la cl tube qui fait partie du jeu d outils 29 spark plug by using the socket wrench in the tool kit Ausbau K1200 Die drei Schrauben losen mit denen die Zylinderkopfhaube befestigt ist Anschlie end die Zyl nderkopfhaube zu sammen mit dem Luftfilter abheben Zund kerze mit dem im Werkzeugsatz enthaltenen Steckschlussel losen D
43. electronic technician should have little difficulty in tracing and correcting a malfunction When troubleshooting the PA2100 Table 6 1 may be useful for isolating a malfunction When replacing small components use care when soldering Heat easily damages integrated circuits transistors capacitors and circuit boards Therefore it is advisable to use long nose pliers or similar heat sink on the component lead being soldered When replacing the Driver Amplifier transistors Q108 and Q109 or the Output Amplifier transistors Q301 and Q302 insure that a matched pair is used In addition always replace the mica insulators Use heat sink compound on both sides of the mica insulators and ensure that they are properly installed Improper installation of the insulator could cause a short circuit Always adjust the symmetry of the output waveform when Q108 and Q109 or R301 and Q302 are replaced To perform his adjustment disconnect the speaker s and connect a 5 5 ohm 200 watt dummy load across the speaker terminals Connect an oscilloscope across the dummy load and activate the Yelp signal Adjust R158 for he best possible square wave See figure 2 for the location of R158 B Removal for Servicing The Siren Module is easily removed from the PA2100 chassis To remove the Siren Module loosen two of the hex head crews on the bottom of the unit and slide the Siren Module out sed figure 6 7 C Circuit Board Removal 1 To remove th
44. hrend des Schnei dens Zuschauer und Tiere aus dem Ar beitsbereich fernhalten Nie mit Trennen beginnen bevor der Arbeitsbereich frei ist und Sie stabil und sicher stehen Halten Sie die Maschine immer mit beiden H nden in einem festen Griff wenn der Motor lauft Halten Sie einen festen Griff mit Daumen und Fingern die sich um den Handgniff schlie en Kommen Sie der Trennscheibe nicht zu nahe wenn der Motor lauft Der Splitterschutz mu immer aufmon tiert sein Halten Sie die Trennscheibe nicht schrag im Schlitz und verkeilen oder klemmen Sie sie nicht ein Kontrollieren da die Trennscheibe frei rotieren kann bevor Sie den Motor an werfen Halten Sie die Handgriffe Beim Tragen der Maschine soll der Mo tor stets abgestellt und der Schall dampfer von Ihrem Korper weggedreht Sein Arbeiten Sie nie mit einer beschadigten oder falsch eingestellten Trennsage oder mit einer Maschine an der ein Teil fehlt oder wo die Montage nicht unter zu friedenstelienden Bedingungen ausge f hrt wurde Kontrollieren da sich die Scheibe nicht mehr dreht wenn der Gas hebel gel st wird Stellen Sie mmer den Motor ab bevor Sie die Maschine niedersetzen trocken sauber und frei von l und Kraftstoff Benutzen Sie die Maschine nur in Rau men mit guter Luftung Ein Versaumnis kann ernsthafte Schaden oder den Tod zur Folge haben Die Trennscheibe soll von der Maschine wahrend des Transports oder der Ver
45. hylsnyckel 381306 Drag fast fastskruven 4 moturs med hyls nyckel 381317 Fit the vee belt and tension it by turning the eccentric 3 to its bottom position clock wise using socket wrench 381306 Tighten the attaching bolt 4 anti clock wise using socket wrench 381317 Montera remskyddsk porna och ratten 5 Spann kilremmen efter 1 2 tankars korning och kontrollera darefter spanningen dag gen Betraffande vandning av kaparm se sid 31 bussningen Fit the drive belt protective casings the bushing and the knob 5 Tension the vee belt after 1 2 tank refills and thereafter every day See page 31 concerning turning the arm Den Keilriemen auflegen und durch Drehen des Exzenters 3 im Uhrzeigersinn mit dem Schlussel 381306 bis zum Anschlag spannen Die Befestigungsschraube 4 entgegen dem Uhrzeigersinn mit dem Schlussel 381317 fest anziehen Riemenschutzkappen Buchse und Knopf wieder montieren 5 Den Keilriemen nach 1 2 Tankfullungen nachspannen und anschlieBend die Span nung taglich kontrollieren Umdrehung des Trennarms siehe Seite 31 Placer la courroie et la tendre en tournant l excentrique 3 fond dans le sens des aiguilles d une montre l aide de la cl douille 381306 Serrer la vis de fixation 4 fond dans le sens inverse des aiguilles d une montre l aide de la cl douille 381317 Monter les couvercles protecteurs de cour rote la douille et le volant 5 Tendre l
46. iF REQUIRED IN YOUR STATE TURNS HIGH BEAM LAMPS STEADY SHUTS OFF FLASHER WHEN DIMMER SWITCH 15 SET FOR HIGH Pg RIGHT Ka LEFT VEHICLE HEAOLIGHTS MIGH BEAM LOW BEAM HIGH BEAM AY LI TO FLASHER POWER SEN SS Lan OO 1 2 3 4 AC f SPI 270240 sg a ag ag ag SWITCH 2100 o DIMMER MASTER SWITCH SWITCH TO VEHICLE HEADLIGHT Switch ACCESSORY CONTROL SWITCH OR OTHER CUSTOMER SUPPLIED SWITCH Figure 3 10 Typical Headlight Flashing circuit 3 13 RELATIVE PA LOUDNESS ADJUSTMENT After all of the electrical wiring to the PA2100 is complete set the SELECTOR switch to PA Depress the microphone push to talk switch speak in a normal voice and adjust the front panel GAIN control for the desired sound level outside the vehicle Turn on the two way radio and adjust the volume for a comfortable listening level inside the vehicle Set the siren SELECTOR switch to RADIO Stand outside of the vehicle and note the radio rebroadcast loudness If it is too loud or too soft adjust R142 accessible through a hole in the top of the unit see figure 3 11 for the desired level Clockwise rotation of R142 decreases the sound level Counterclockwise rotation increases the sound level When this adjustment is completed the loudness of the radio rebroadcast and public address may be controlled with the front panel GAIN control Secure the PA2100 to the mounting bracket with
47. is to be used for the Interceptor and the two way radio remove the microphone from the two way radio This microphone must be plugged into the receptacle in the bottom of the Interceptor If the microphone does not have a plug it must be equipped with an Amphenol Type 91 MC4M male plug preferably with the 1 pin in line with the polarizing key Wire as shown in the diagram on this sheet Connect the Red and Green leads of the radio adapter cable to the speaker leads of the two way radio Connect the bare lead to the low side of the microphone circuit in the control head and the Black lead to the high side of the microphone circuit Connect the Blue lead to a ground point on the control head and the Yellow lead to the push to talk circuit of the radio Refer to your radio circuit diagram and to the diagram of the Interceptor Plug the six pin connector of the cable into the six pin connector on the rear of the Interceptor The microphone will be connected to the RADIO in all positions of the Selector Switch except PA TM 5 4210 228 14 amp P 1 KIT NO I46B203 INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS FOR FN 203 WIRED IN ADAPTER CABLE FOR RADIO fs FEDERAL GRN vC BARE gt A gt MIC LO MIC HI EA GROUND TRANSMIT WIRING DIAGRAM Use with 146 203 Cable 256A109B TM 5 4210 228 14 amp P 1 PRICE 0 50 FEDERAL SIGN amp SIGNAL CORPORATION INSTALLATION AND SERVICE INSTRUCTIONS MODEL PA 20A INTERCEPTOR ELECT
48. ist Den Drehgriff 17 losen der den Spreng schutz und den R emenschutz fixiert Den Riemenschutz nach vorn abziehen so da der Riemen frei liegt Die Sicherungsmutter Courroie d entrainement K65 La courroie d entrainement est enti rement incorpor e et bien prot g e contre la pous s ere et contre tout dommage pouvant sur venir pendant le sciage Lors de tension de la courroie d entraine ment d visser les crous qui maintiennent le bras d coupeur l aide de l outil 381306 Enlever le volant 17 qui bloque le capot protecteur et la protection de courroie Enlever la protection de courroie vers l avant 14 adjust the screw using wrench 381158 The vee belt must be tensioned so much that it cannot quite be pushed down against the bottom of the cutter arm with normal thumb force A force of 4 kgf 8 8 Ibf should be needed to press down the drive belt 5 mm 0 2 Tighten the lock nut and then the two nuts retaining the cutter arm Slide on the belt protector and tighten the knob an der Spannschraube losen und die Schraube mit dem Schlussel 381158 ver stellen Der Antriebsriemen soll so hart ge spannt sein da er mit normaler Daumen kraft kaum nach unten gegen den Trennarm eingedruckt werden kann Um den Riemen 5 mm einzudrucken soll eine Kraft von 4 kp erforderlich sein Die Sicherungsmutter und anschlie end die beiden Muttern die den Trennarm halten an ziehen Den Riemenschutz aufschieben und den Drehgriff an
49. leave the cab The remote actuator allows the operator to open the nitrogen cylinders from the hose reel area The actuators are operated simply by pulling the ring pin and pushing a lever remote actuator or button dashboard actuator The expellant gas from a small nitrogen cartridge flows through 1 4 inch tubing to the pneumatic valve actuators which open all five of the nitrogen cylinders Extinguishing Agents This system combines the effects of two agents Purple K dry chemical and ANSULITE AFFF aqueous film forming foam to suppress and secure a fire The dry chemical provides rapid knockdown of flames to gain initial control over the fire The AFFF creates a film forming foam to prevent fire reflash As the foam supported film spreads over the fire it prevents the escape of flammable vapors excludes oxygen from the fuel surface and helps cool the hazard area 1 5 INTRODUCTION 1 TM 5 4210 228 14 amp 1 TABLE OF SPECIFICATIONS Vehicle Type General Dimensions Length Overall Width Overall Height Maximum Wheelbase Gross Vehicle Weight Rated Gross Vehicle Weight Actual Chassis Manufacturer Model Type 1350 PKP 200 AFFF Suppressing Securing System Dry Chemical System Model Type Agent Expellant Capacity Nitrogen Cylinder Pressure Charged Nitrogen Cylinder Tank Capacity Operating Pressure AFFF System Model Type Agent Expellant Capacity Nitrogen Cylinder Pressure Charged N
50. make use of the provisions for PA and radio rebroadcast a Federal Model MNCT Microphone or the vehicle s two way radio microphone and the appropriate adapter module are required The Model MNCT Microphone and a line of adapter modules to fit most popular makes of two way radio microphones are available as options from Federal The adapter modules include the wiring required to interconnect the PA 2100 with the micro phone and the two way radio 1 The Siren Module can be easily removed from the vehicle without disturbing he wiring to the control switches and without disabling the vehicle accessories horn lights radio gunlock etc The Control Module contains all of e circuitry and devices necessary to control the entire vehicle warning light system ad accessories The Control Module also routes power to the Siren Module An external 50 ampere automatic reset circuit breaker is supplied to protect the vehicle warning light system A panel light and a pilot light are illuminated whenever the vehicle ignition switch is 1 2 SIREN MODULE Most of the solid state electronic circuitry in the Siren Module is mounted on printed circuit boards This circuitry provides a high level of performance and reliability over a wide range of environmental conditions The circuitry incorporates feed back that maintains high audio quality for PA and radio rebroadcast functions The 2tronic circuitry in the Siren Module is protected by a 20
51. men om kaparmen ar vand 180 drages den fast moturs Se aven sidan 31 The disc ts located between the flange hub a and the flange washer b Turn the flange washer round so that it fits into the flange hub The cutter disc should be tightened by using the fixed wrench 381317 that is n cluded in the tool kit Support the shaft with the spark plug wrench The disc is to be tightened clockwise but if the cutter arm is turned 180 it must be tightened in counter clockwise direction See also page 31 Die Trennscheibe wird zwischen der Fianschnabe a und der Flanschscheibe b angebracht Die Flanschscheibe ist so zu drehen da sie in die Flanschnabe pa t Die Scheibe soll mit dem festen Schlussel 381317 der zum Werkzeugsatz gehort an gezogen werden Stemmen Sie die Welle mit dem Zundkerzenschlussel Die Scheibe ist Im Uhrzeigersinn zu ziehen wenn aber der Trennarm 180 gedreht ist ist er ent gegengesetzt dem Uhrzeigersinn zu ziehen Siehe auch 31 Le disque est plac entre le moyeu de bride a et de bride b L appui de bride est tourn de sorte qu il s adapte dans le moyeu de bride Le disque d coupeur est serr l aide de la clef tube 381317 qui fait partie du jeu d outils Maintenir l axe l aide de la clef bougie Le disque est serr dans le sens des aiguilles d une montre amis si le bras de disque est tourn de 180 le serrage doit tre effectu dans le sens inverse celui des
52. oder die Maschine falsch benutzt wird besteht die Gefahr von Verletzungen fur Personen die mit der Trennsage arbeiten oder sich in unmittelbarer Nahe davon auf halten Machen Siesich daher mit den Sicher heitsvorschriften auf Seite 8 vertraut Eine Trenns ge darf unter keinen Umst n den in ihrer urspr nglichen Konstruktion abge ndert werden es sei denn mit aus dr cklicher schriftlicher Erlaubnis des Wer kes Nicht autorisierte Anderungen k nnen die Sicherheit gef hrden Das Werk behalt sich das Recht vor ande rungen ohne vorherige Mitteilung vorzuneh men AB PARTNER Avant propos Afin que votre nouvelle d coupeuse devien ne juste titre la bonne PARTNER sur la quelle vous pourrez corhpter nous tenons souligner qu il est Important que soient effectu s r guli rement certains contr les et travaux d entretien La d coupeuse est un outil de travail haute capacit de d coupage Elle est quip e de syst mes de s curit qui rendent le travail aussi s r que possible S ces syst mes de s curit sont hors fonction ou si la d cou peuse est employ e n gligemment ou de fa on incorrecte elle peut risquer d occa sionner des blessures son utilisateur et aux personnes se trouvant dans son entourage imm diat 11 faut donc lire attentivement les prescriptions se r f rant la s curit page 9 ll ne faut jamais modifier la conception originale d une d coupeuse sans avoir l au toris tion
53. of Q102 applies positive voltage to CR103 and R104 to start the Yelp signal The positive voltage from 0102 also turns on IC101C 1C101C acts as part of the discharge path for C106 The Yelp signal continues until the Auxiliary Input circuit causes 106 to produce another positive pulse at 105 3 As a result the voltage at IC105 1 returns to its high level turning off Q102 and normal siren operation resumes IC105 7 is held at ground potential for Il operation However when the SELECTOR switch SW301 is set to RADIO PA or MANUAL Il operation is not required Therefore to prevent the operation of the TAP Il circuitry when SW301 is set to RADIO PA or MANUAL IC105 is held reset by the application of the positive supply voltage to IC105 7 1C105 7 is also held positive between switch positions so that IC105 is held reset as the position of SW301 is changed 5 5 PREAMPLIFIER AND AMPLIFIER STAGES All siren and audio signals are applied to the Preamplifier 107 Siren signals are applied through C114 and R147 to 107 6 Audio signals from the microphone or radio are coupled through C115 id RI45 to IC107 2 16 TM 5 4210 228 14 amp P 1 amplified output 1C107 8 is coupled through C118 to the primary of T102 The secondary of T102 plies a push pull input to the Driver Amplifier Q108 and Q109 The collectors of is stage are coupled to the output Amplifier Q301 and Q302 The output of p301 and Q302 is
54. reading the RK 4 instruction book Allowing for the difference in Power your RK 1 Rescue Kit will perform practically all the operations that can be done with the more powerful RK 4 Kit although it uses different attachments So when making hook ups outlined in the RK 4 Manual sim ply substitute similar attachments listed in this folder for those listed on pages 4 5 and 6 of instruction book AUTOMOTIVE DIVISION OF H K PORTER INC Somerville Mass U S A 02143 SM 41 SM 44 SM 39 RR SM 40 TM 5 4210 228 14 amp P 1 THE 4 TON POWER SOURCE The P F RK 1 Rescue Kit is powered by the fast action PF 4 Ton Remote Control Hydraulic Jack This fast operating power source gives 1 of ram travel for every 61 2 pump strokes so important when the saving of life may be a matter of seconds Power from the pump is transmitted to the P F self retracting ram which operates in all positions For pump operations to extend and retract ram see page 3 of RK4 book ATTACHMENTS SM 41 RAM BASE Attaches to either end of ram to provide a solid base Can be used as a flat surfaced push plate when attached to end of ram piston whenever a wide flat pushing surface is needed SM 49 RAM CAPS Attach to ram piston Grooved to set against flanges and serrated to prevent slipping when working against surfaces where traction is needed SM 43 RUBBER HEADS Flat topped rubber anchors that can be used on either end of the ram to pr
55. s y rassemblent alors pour tre vacu es tout en prot geant utilisateur A l aide du volant 17 page 4 le protecteur est d serr pour tre regl dans la position d sir e 18 TM 5 4210 228 14 amp P 1 IE Br nsletank God renlighet skall iakttagas vid branslepa fyllningen Detta minskar risken for drifts stopp orsakade av att bransletankens filter blivit igensatt Filterpatronen kan inte ren goras utan m ste bytas ut om den ar igen satt Filterpatronen bor dock bytas minst en g ng per r Fuel tank The fuel tank must be protected from mpuri ties when filling up with fuel This decreases the risk of running interruptions caused by blockage of the fuel tank filter The filter cartridge cannot be cleaned but must be replaced f it becomes blocked This re placement should be done once a year Kraftstofftank Der Kraftstofftank mu vor Verunreini gungen beim Tanken geschutzt werden Dadurch werden auch Betriebsstorungen aufgrund eines verstopften Kraftstoffilters im Tank vermieden Die Filterpatrone kann nicht gereinigt werden falls sie verstopft ist Ein derartiger Austausch ist in der Regel einmal pro Jahr erforderlich Reservoir de carburant Une grande propret doit tre observee lors du remplissage de carburant et cela afin de reduire les risques d arr t pouvant tre occas onnes par un filtre carburant col mate L el ment filtrant ne peut tre nettoye et doit donc tre remplace lorsqu il es
56. temperatures etc it is recommended that the tests be performed immediately An Inspection Sheet Ansul Form No F 7880 is available for recording all test data Initial Inspection When first putting the Ansul AFFF concentrate into service it is recommended that the following be recorded 1 Concentrate Refractive Index 2 Quality of Concentrate Sample Initially the refractive index of the concentrate should be measured The procedure is described on Page 3 of this manual By submitting the concentrate s batch number to The Ansul Company the initial refractive index can be Ansul AFFF 396 or 696 Concentrate Quality of Sample 1 Remove lid from Ansul AFFF concentrate container 2 Stir solution vigorously for 30 seconds using a non metallic rod or shake container 3 Use only clean dry apparatus to extract and contain solution sample If doubtful clean apparatus with detergent Alconox rinse well and dry 4 Extract a small amount of liquid from a depth of at least 6 inches below liquid level and replace container lid TM 5 4210 228 14 amp P 1 TEST PROCEDURES ANSUL AFFF CONCENTRATE obtained Determination of the Quality of Concentrate Sample is described on Page 2 Both of the above test results should be recorded on the inspection sheet Periodic Inspection As described on Pages 2 4 the periodic inspections will involve the following tests 1 Quality of Sample 2 Measurement of Refractive Index If the concentr
57. through valve handle s into bracket s and seal with visual inspection seal s Ansul Part No 15999 44 Make certain both turret valve operating controls are in the closed position 45 Rewind hose on reel NOTE Do not lock hose reel 4 16 46 Secure nozzle assembly on holder and insert ring pin NOTE Make certain nozzle trigger s are forward in the CLOSED position 47 Replace cartridge in dashboard actuator if used a Pull out dashboard actuator button and insert ring pin to assure safe cartridge installation b Remove spent cartridge c Remove safety shipping cap from replacement cartridge Weigh cartridge Replace if weight is 1 4 ounce 7 1 g or more below weight stamped on cartridge NOTE Use cartridge Ansul Part No 24380 only Order cartridge shipping assembly Ansul Part No 7013 to assure receiving correct replacement cartridge 4 17 TM 5 4210 228 14 amp P 1 RECHARGE INSTRUCTIONS TM 5 4210 228 14 amp P 1 RECHARGE INSTRUCTIONS d Screw cartridge into actuator hand tighten e Seal ring pin to actuator stem with visual inspection seal Ansul Part No 15999 48 Replace cartridge in remote actuator If used a Remove guard and spent cartridge b Remove safety shipping cap from replacement cartridge Weigh cartridge Replace if weight is 1 4 ounce 7 1 g or more below weight stamped on cartridge NOTE Use cartridge Ansul Part No 24380 only Order cartridge shippin
58. to assure safe cartridge installation Screw cartridge into actuator hand tighten Replace cartridge guard and insert ring pin through guard into puncture lever link f Seal with visual inspection seal Ansul Part No 15999 52 Check cartridge in remote actuator if unused a Pull ring pin and remove guard b Remove cartridge from actuator c Weigh cartridge Replace if weight is 1 4 ounce 7 1 g or more below weight stamped on cartridge NOTE Use cartridge Ansul Part No 24380 only Order cartridge shipping assembly Ansul Part No 7013 to assure receiving correct replacement cartridge 6 19 TM 5 4210 228 14 amp P 1 MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS TM 5 4210 228 14 amp 1 MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS d Raise puncture lever to assure safe cartridge installation e Screw cartridge into actuator hand tighten f Replace cartridge guard and insert ring pin through guard into puncture lever link g Seal with visual inspection seal Ansul Part No 15999 6 20 53 54 55 56 Make certain all rescue equipment is properly secured Make certain all doors are tightly latched Notify operating personnel that fire suppressing securing system is back in service Record date of maintenance examination 6 21 6 22 Blank TM 5 4210 228 14 amp 1 MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS TM 5 4210 228 14 amp P 1 SECTION 7 SERVICE AND REPAIR The best assurance against fire suppressing securi
59. to connect with Pull Arm As sembly Insert Connecting Pins SL 7 CAUTION Connecting Pins must ALWAYS be used in all pull ing operations TUBING Desired Length s 2 C Additional lengths of Tubing may be added to reach any desired length but pins MUST be inserted between each two lengths of Tubing and between Tubing and SL 1 Con nectors Finish off end of Tubing with Male Adapter SL 1 and at tach either Long Spreading Toe BU 912 or Jack Piston Spreading Toe BU 905 This set up as shown in diagram below REVERSES power application from pushing to BU 580 gt BU 581 5 4210 228 14 amp P 1 A TM 5 4210 228 14 amp P 1 SPREADING OPERATIONS For Persons Caught In Trees Etc When used against trees timbers or poles and it is necessary to push against another soft material a firmly anchored non slip operation may be obtained by using the Cleated Push Plate BU 581 on Ram Piston and the Cleated Ram Base BU 586 on bottom of Ram This hook up eliminates the neces sity of notching trees or poles io give a flat surface to jack against See illustration Page 20 THE P F SPREADER BU 750 This powerful attachment is one of the most versatile and useful attachments in the P F Hydraulic Rescue Kit See method of attaching onPage8 Its use is indi cated whenever there is a space problem as the jaws close to only 14 giving entry in very narrow space
60. u ns Ser E EE 5 316186 yz BL 316128 910 2214438 a DS N 314155 E 2737 WEST FULTON STREET CHICAGO ILLINOIS 60612 PARTNER INDUSTRIES OF AMERICA INC For further information call or write 316194 us 3 700100 12 B yaaa a bide blade cuts steel E BE i ooth carbi L 3604 a 700150 12 S etos 700205 12 cuts concrete D 24 tooth carbide blade 7 31615 316139 31604 11 74 97023 3 y fy TM 5 4210 228 14 amp P 1 256A358 SIGNAL Eg DIVISION Ne ee Federal Signal Corporation Printed in U S A RAR INST ABLINGAGHeradyintcDODO RES ARBSEMBLY 1 Remove two screws located at identification plate Slide dome assembly out 2 le EEN 8 SN loca fed at idenification plate Sud as r Quta ORT AS Aer das the P cade OP AMS SA with the sipte dndthe estrusiopna sIMRARTAN EewYemaaayirbasei to slightly bow the dome assembly out to allow it to line up with the extrusion slots 3 Slide on dome assembly and secure with two screws removed in step 1 2 EXTRUSION SLOTS CURVED HOOKS eg p X 5 8 TRS HO SCREWS IDENTIFICATION PLATE 29081306 TM 5 4210 228 14 amp P 1 UNITY MANUFACTURING COMPANY Rear Decklights AG 6 Ansul Part No S 28259 Front Spotlights Model 225 Ansul Part No 52540 Ansul Part No S 52541 TM 5 4210 228 14 amp P 1 lt gt U
61. what constitutes defec Defects of workmanship and material under this warranty will be This warranty does not extend to any electronic siren which has been subjected to abuse misuse improper installation or violation of any instructions supplied by us nor extended to units which have been ser This warranty takes precedence over all other warranties expressed or implied and no representative or other person is authorized to assume for Federal Signal Corporation any other liability in connection with the 290A3898 FEDERAL SIGNAL CORPORATION MA ATA T d ZAR RP PPP pci 2 TM 5 4210 228 14 amp P 1 SECTION GENERAL DESCRIPTION FEDFRAL mil nan SIREN 29041052 Figure 1 1 Model PA2100 Siren Control System 1 1 GENERAL The Federal Model PA 2100 SIRACOM II 1 1 is a precision built compact Siren Control System of advanced design It consists of a Siren Module and a Control Module The PA 2100 is designed to operate from a nominal 12 volt DC negative ground electrical system The speaker terminals on the rear panel of the unit in conjunction with a slide switch on the rear of the siren module inside of the housing allow the use of either 100 watt or 58 watt speakers The Siren Module produces three distinct sounds This module also has provisions for public address PA amplification of radio messages radio rebroadcast and manual siren operation If it is desired to
62. x 900 Brass a OO JOE ob ch sch se P sch SB M WWWWDND A A A TM 5 4210 228 14 amp P 1 ANSUL CYLINDER PIPING ASSEMLY amp 28 4 21 rot iO CS 8 12 TM 5 4210 228 14 amp P 1 ANSUL CYLINDER PIPING ASSEMBLY DESCRIPTION QUANTITY PART NO Oylinder Piping Assembly Nitrogen Cylinder Rack End Plate Spacer on 3 center cylinder racks Washer Flat 3 8 S S Lockwasher 3 8 S S Screw Cap Hex Hd 3 8 16NC S S Hose Reel Base Angle 2 x 3 x 1 4 39 LG Bolt Hex Hd 3 8 16NC x 1 1 4 S S Lockwasher 3 8 S S Nut Hex 3 8 16NC S S Nitrogen Cylinder 400 Label Label Valve Quick Opening Plug Safety Shipping Cap Shipping Label Hose and Adapter Assembly Angle 2 x 2 x 1 4 39 1 2 LG Union Swivel Adapter 3 4 Elbow 3 4 x 900 Brass Manifold Nitrogen call Ansul for replacement Nipple 3 8 x 1 1 2 S S Stud S S Washer Flat 1 2 S S Lockwasher 1 2 S S Nut Hex 1 2 13NC S S Manifold Nitrogen call Ansul for replacement Elbow 1 1 4 x 900 Brass Union Swivel Adapter 1 1 4 Regulator Hi Flow Hose and Adapter Assembly U Bolt 1 4 20 x 2 1 4 x 1 3 4 zinc plated Lockwasher 1 4 Nut Hex 1 4 Bolt Hex Hd 3 8 16NC x 2 S S Washer Flat 3 8 S S Lockwasher 3 8 S S Nut Hex 3 8 16NC S S Washer Flat 3 8 S S
63. 0 sq hectometers 386 sq mile Cubic Measure To change inches feet yards miles square inches square feet square yards square miles acres cubic feet cubic yards fluid ounces pints quarts gallons ounces pounds short tons pound feet pound inches 1 cu centimeter 1000 cu millimeters 06 cu inch 1 cu decimeter 1000 cu centimeters 61 02 cu inches 1 cu meter 1000 cu decimeters 35 31 cu feet Approximate Conversion Factors To centimeters meters meters kilometers square centimeters square meters square meters square kilometers square hectometers cubic meters cubic meters milliliters liters liters liters grams kilograms metric tons Newton meters Newton meters Fahrenheit temperature Multiply by 2 540 305 914 1 609 6 451 093 836 2 590 405 028 765 29 573 473 946 3 785 28 349 454 907 1 356 11296 To change ounce inches centimeters meters meters kilometers square centimeters square meters square meters square kilometers square hectometers cubic meters cubic meters milliliters liters liters liters grams kilograms metric tons Temperature Exact 5 9 after subtracting 32 Celsius temperature To Newton meters inches feet yards miles square inches square feet square yards square miles acres cubic feet cubic yards fluid ounces pints quarts gallons ounces pounds short tons
64. 0 x 3 4 hexagon head machine screws 1 4 20 hexagon nuts and 1 4 inch split lock washers as shown figure 3 3 ELECTRONIC SIREN BRACKET TO MOUNTING The height of the unit above or below a surface may be adjusted by selecting a set of mounting holes in the bracket Mount the unit to the bracket with the two 1 4 20 x 5 16 hexagon head machine screws as shown i The unit may be tilted to any convenient position BRACKET BENEATH UNIT CAN SERVE AS A MOUNTING BASE FOR MOUNTING ON FLOOR TO SURFACE DASH OR SIMILAR AREA LOOSEN 2 SCREWS AND SLIDE UNIT OUT FOR SERVICE Figure 2 Positioning Unit in Mounting Bracket 3 TM 5 4210 228 14 amp P 1 A 4 20 HEXAGON NUT 2 BD aem Ta INCH SPLIT LOCKWASHER 2 USE BRACKET AS TEMPLATE FOR MOUNTING HOLE LOCATION USE SET OF HOLES ICH PROVIDES 1 3 BEST MOUNTING 74 20 x Ya INCH HEX HEAD SCREW 2 V 20 x Ne MEX HEAD SCREW 2 Figure 3 Installation of Mounting Bracket Figure 4 Hear View of Electronic Siren 4 3 4 POWER CABLE INSTALLATION The power cable included in the amplifier carton is equipped with an eight prong plug that mates with the connector P3 on the rear of the electronic siren see The various wires on the connector must be connected as described below A Speaker The unit is designed to operate with one 11 ohm impedance speaker or two 11 ohm impedance speakers connected in parallel Speakers
65. 1 4 20 x 3 4 hex head screws and 1 4 split lockwashers Tilt the PA 2100 to the desired position and tighten the 1 4 20 x 3 4 hex head screws 27021033 Figure 3 11 2100 Top View TM 5 4210 228 14 amp P 1 MASTER 2904 033 Figure 4 1 PA2100 Front View 4 1 GENERAL As shown In figure 4 1 all PA 2100 operating controls are located on the front panels of both the Siren Module and the Control Module A line of optional adapter modules allows the user the option of using either the siren s own microphone PA override or the two way radio microphone common microphone The optional Model MNCT Microphone and Model FN900 Adapter Module are required when PA override operation is used When the siren is connected for PA override operation the two way radio and the siren each have their own separate microphones In addition the public address is available in any SELECTOR switch position E except RADIO when the microphone push to talk switch is depressed In common microphone operation the radio microphone is used for both the siren and the two way radio in the vehicle A Federal adapter module that is designed to accommodate the two way radio microphone connects the siren directly to the radio The common microphone is electrically connected to the two way radio in all SELECTOR switch positions except PA When the SELECTOR switch is set to PA the two way radio microphone is connected to the siren amplifier s
66. 1 7 4273 24 4274 42 4274 25 4275 29 4276 26 4277 79 4281 20 96463 M802 4514 14 4545 3 4607 5 50571 31 81865 CS8410 TTX 507 9 507 5 5112 4 51187 32 5151 13 53032 53195 28 53195 5361 8 54404 36 545 13 545 36 545 5 545 18 545 5 5816 31 01029 AIITT 5829 2 9 8 TM 5 4210 228 14 amp P 1 NUMERICAL INDEX ANSUL PAGE FIG FSCM VENDOR PART NO NO NO PART NO 598 12 598 7 6354 7 6355 10 6579 10 6579 4 7013 8 1 27 7013 8 1 7013 8 26 7066 8 7095 7486 5 7787 19 8105 11 8284 4 8292 13 8762 23 8940 28 8987 8 957 24 968 12 968 35 968 4 968 31 968 4 9 9 910 Blank TM 5 4210 228 14 amp P 1 APPENDIX The appendix contains the following Ee Bl EIE El El AFFF Field Inspection Manual Form F7880 Field Inspection Record Temperature Correction Chart Ansul Quick Opening Valve AFFF Recharge Guide Vehicle Accessory Manuals Federal Sign and Signal Corporation C E Niehoff Company Unity Manufacturing Company Paratech Incorporated H K Porter Inc Sierra Company Hurst Performance Inc TM 5 4210 228 14 amp P 1 ANSUL AFFF FIELD INSPECTION MANUAL A1 TM 5 4210 228 14 amp P 1 FIELD ANSUL AFFF INSPECTION AQUEOUS e MANUAL FILM FORMING FOAM INTRODUCTION This manual is designed t serve as a guide to inspection procedures for Ansul AFFF 396 and Ansul AFFF 696 in both the concentrate and premix forms The procedures are those recommended by t
67. 10UF 10V tantalum 01 UF 25V disc MAIN CIRCUIT BOARD PARTS LIST Schematic Part No Symbol 100A207 C105 C106 C108 C113 118 100A712 C114 115 C119 120 100A205 100A705 100A714 100A717 100A208 100A201 0 1004222 1004719 1 102 104 106 1004236 1004715 IC103 100A716 100A718 IC105 100A414 100A273 IC107 100A22 100A23 Q101 106 100A313 100A228 Q102 105 110 100A233 Q103 105B204 100A25 Q104 100A210 100A21 Q107 100A290 100A724 Q108 109 103A128 100A268 CR101 102 103 105A244 104 105 106 100A266 108 109 113 100A320 114 116 103A130 CR110 100A222 CR111 112 115 104A11 T101 T102 P101 102 103 107A263 107A6345 107A226 FRONT CIRCUIT BOARD PARTS LIST Description Resistor 470 Ohm FC 10 1 4 Watt Resistor 4 7K Ohm FC 10 1 4 Watt Resistor 47 Ohm FC 10 1 4 Watt Capacitor 10UF 10V tantalum Pilot Light LED Red Diode TI51 Lamp 14V CM382 Switch Pushbutton Switch Rotary Connector Right Angle Terminal USECO 1280BI Front Circuit Board without parts Front Circuit Board with parts installed RELAY CIRCUIT BOARD PARTS LIST Diode ED3002S CL 1 Relay SPDT 12V Switch Rocker 9 Section Miniature Relay Circuit Board without parts Relay Circuit Board with parts installed 28 Description CAPACITORS Continued 047UF 50V Mylar A7UF 15V tantalum 150UF 15V tantalum 82UF 15V tantalum 1UF 100V Mylar 0033UF 100V disc SEMICONDUCTORS Circu
68. 2 Flasher input Flasher output Vehicle horn ring Vehicle horn Flasher Off override2A Flasher On override Not connected MASTER Circuit 1 MASTER Circuit 2 MASTER Circuit 3 Not connected Ignition switch connection Radio Control for radio rebroadcast Speaker Terminals Chart 1 2 48 TM 5 4210 228 14 amp P 1 SECTION II SPECIFICATIONS 2 1 GENERAL Input Voltage eR etus 10VDC to 16VDC 16VDC opera EERE NIERE ERRER REEERE EE EEEE EAEE EAE EAEE ET EN tion limited to 15 min E Negative ground only Standby Current MASTER 0 mA not including panel lamp switch set to position 0 Operating Temperature 30 C to 65 C Dimensions HW D excluding sse 2 3 8 x 7 7 8 x 8 heat sink knob and rear mim 6cm x 20cm x 20 3cm Weight aoppros 1 10 Ib 4 5kg 2 2 SIREN Operating Current 4 OVDC WAIL 1 Low Power Speaker 5 amperes 2 Low Power Speakers or 1 High Power Speaker AA 10 amperes 2 High Power 15 amperes Frequency Range a 550 to 1500Hz Cycle Bate uec o nene on once nad usi WAIL 10 cycles min ENE M YELP 180 cycles min Miete HI LO 50 cycles min Voltage Output approx 1 Low Power Speaker A 45VP P 2 Low Power Speakers 40V P P 1 High Power Gpeaker AA 64V P P 2 High Power nnn 60V
69. 25 and 27 by authorized workshop adjust when necessary when necessary every other month every other week 1 2 refillings daily at least once a year every week Wartungsplan TM 5 4210 228 14 amp P 1 Vorbeugende Wartungsarbeiten an der Trennsage sind in diesem Heft angegeben worden Nachstehend geben wir Ihnen eine Zusammenstellung dieser Arbeiten Die Zeitabstande im Wartungsplan sind ma gebend wenn die Trennsage mindestens 4 Stunden taglich ver wendet wird Wird die Trennsage taglich kurzere Zeit verwendet konnen die kurzesten Zeit abstande ohne weiteres verlangert werden Einheit der Trennsage Splitterschutz Regler Anwerfvorrichtung Luftfilter Vorfilter Hauptfilter Leckfilter Vergaser Zundkerze Motor Antriebsriemen Kraftstofftank Schrauben u Muttern Ma nahme Funktionskontrolle Funktionskontrolle Reinigung und Schmierung von beweglichen Teilen Sauberschutteln Reinigen auswechseln Reinigen auswechseln Reinigen einstellen Kontrolle und Einstellen des Elektrodenabstands Auswechseln Kuhlflanschen reinigen Neuer Antriebsrtemen spannen Danach Spannung kontrollieren Filterpatrone kontrollieren Nachziehen Schema d entretien Dans la presentation ci dessus se retrouvent differentes mesures necessaires d entretien correct de la decoupeuse Les intervalles de temps qui figurent dans le pr sentation con stituent des donnees auxquelles l faut se referer si la d coupeuse est emp
70. 28 14 amp P 1 RECHARGE INSTRUCTIONS 24 Submerge hose and fill remainder of tank with water to within 2 inches 51 mm from the bottom of the fill opening reducing rate of water flow as tank becomes full 25 Stir solution for 30 seconds use a non metallic rod 26 Clean fill opening threads and gasket seating surface 27 Examine fill cap gasket for elasticity cuts or cracking TM 5 4210 228 14 amp P 1 RECHARGE INSTRUCTIONS 28 Clean and coat gasket lightly with a good grade of high heat resistant grease 29 Inspect threads in fill cap and on fill opening for nicks burrs cross threading rough or feathered edges clean and coat fill cap threads lightly with a good grade of high heat resistant grease 30 Secure fill cap hand tighten 31 Read cylinder gauge s Note pressure check ambient temperature and refer to Temperature Correction Chart in Appendix Replace cylinder s if below minimum pressure 4 9 TM 5 4210 228 14 amp P 1 RECHARGE INSTRUCTIONS 32 To replace nitrogen cylinder s a Remove crescent ring from cross shaft b Remove cap nut and anchor stud Slide actuator arm off cross shaft d Remove high pressure hose from cylinder valve CAUTION Do not place your body or head in front of cylinder valve outlet If valve is accidentally operated velocity of unrestricted escaping gas is forceful enough to cause injury especially about the face and head 4 10 TM 5 4210
71. 3 Flange Side Outlet 3 150 Nipple 1 2 x 2 1 2 Elbow Union 1 2 x 900 Tee 3 Gasket Stud Bolt 3 8 w 2 Nuts Screw Hex Hd 3 4 1ONC x 2 S S Washer Flat 3 4 S S Lockwasher 3 4 S S Nut Hex 3 4 10NC S S Gasket Manhole Not Shown Tube Assembly Gas Not Shown a P ch F PF P P OO NM sch HAH HANH HAH M M sch sch sch PN P e sch M D sch o 8 9 5 4210 228 14 amp P 1 ANSUL AFFF TANK ASSEMBLY 8 10 TM 5 4210 228 14 amp P 1 ANSUL AFFF TANK ASSEMBLY EA DESCRIPTION QUANTITY PART NO AFFF 200 Tank Assembly Tank Assembly Fill Cap Assembly Brass Gasket Valve Connector 3 Elbow 3 4 x 900 Brass Seal Visual Inspection Ring Pin Chain Ring Pin Nipple 3 x 3 Lg Valve Ball 3 Bronze Tee 3 Brass Bushing Reducing 3 x 3 4 Brass Pipe 3 4 x 10 Lg Elbow Union 3 4 x 900 Brass Pipe 3 4 x 35 Valve Ball 3 4 Bracket Nameplate Screw Pipe 3 4 x 9 Lg Pipe 3 4 x 141 2 Lg Elbow Street 3 4 x 900 Brass Tee 3 4 Brass Nipple 3 4 x 6 Lg Valve Check Nipple Close 3 4 Valve Safety 1 Tee 1 Brass Nipple Close 1 Bushing Reducing 1 x 1 2 Brass Nipple 1 2 x 1 1 2 Lg Brass Valve Ball 1 2 Bracket Nameplate Screw Hex Hd Cap 3 4 1 ONC x 2 S S Lockwasher 3 4 S S Nut Hex 3 4 1ONC S S Washer Flat 3 4 S S Bushing Reducing 1 x 3 4 Brass Elbow 3
72. 5 6 30 Amber Blue Clear Red 28 57 6566U Ring Assy 275 6 30 1282 5 Spitfire Dome Blue or Red 6570 Head Assy 225 37 50 RV26 45 846 46 27 6570U Head Assy 275 37 50 1286 A Base RV26 45 amp 46 51 17 6578 Shell Assy 225 18 43 1287 Motor RV45 amp 46 60 00 6579 Shell Assy 275 18 43 1290 A Ring Assy RV25 7 20 6598 ne KEE 13 1291 Ring Assy RV26 45 amp 46 13 10 6701 Handle amp Housing Assy 19 63 1292 Gear Train RV1 5 30 77 6710 Housing amp Tube Assy 1294 Gear Train NOIS iUi 20 70 RV25 26 45 amp 4643 20 6715 Housing amp Tube Assy 1347 Magnet RV25 13 30ea EE 20 70 1368 Magnet RV26 45 amp 46 16 13 ea 6750FM Sub Handle 9 00 1386 Spring for RV15 25 amp 45 80 6770 Head Assy 250 35 40 1387 Spring for RV26 A 46 1 27 6770U Head Assy 0250 35 40 1395 Motor for RV15 47 50 6778 Shell Assy 250 18 43 1469 1 Wire Assy
73. 5 3 WAIL YELP OR HI LO OPERATION Set the SELECTOR switch to the desired siren position 5 4 MANUAL SIREN OPERATION Set the SELECTOR switch to the MANUAL Sition Depress the SIREN button or connected activate the auxiliary switch activate the siren from the horn ring itch the toggle switch must be in the position TM 5 4210 228 14 amp P 1 SECTION VI THEORY OF OPERATION 6 1 GENERAL The major circuitry consists of a wail yelp timing oscillator hi lo timing oscillator sweep oscillator microphone pre amplifier emitter follower driver amplifier and output amplifier Sed figure 11 6 2 WAIL YELP TIMING OSCILLATOR In the WAIL or YELP position Q1 and Q2 function as a timing oscillator The output of the timing oscillator determines the frequency of operation of the sweep oscillator Q5 and Q6 Initially assume SELECTOR switch set to WAIL and Q1 on C3 charges through R4 and the emitter collector junction of Q1 When C3 is sufficiently charged Q1 cuts off which turns on Q2 C3 discharges through R10 The charge and discharge of C3 determines the repetition rate 10 cycles minute in the WAIL mode In the YELP mode C4 has a similar function as C3 The repetition rate in the YELP mode in approximately 180 cycles minute An RC network C6 R12 in WAIL and C5 R11 in YELP develops a slowly rising and falling voltage having a triangular shape This rising and falling voltage is applied to the sweep oscillator and determ
74. 6 2x 100 Gallons of concentrate 100 6 2 100 2 gallons 100 Replace 2 gallons of solution with 2 gallons of ANSULITE AFFF concentrate and stir solution for 30 seconds using a non metallic rod Replace entire AFFF solution charge Replace entire AFFF solution charge Replace using factory built and pressure or obstructed tested assembly only Replace using factory built and pressure tested assembly only The term caked as applied to dry chemical describes a condition It is best identified as dry chemical containing hard lumps These lumps will render a dry chemical extinguisher inoperative The condition usually follows the absorption and later the evaporation of an unusual amount of moisture It is often confused with packing a condition produced by normal settling by vibration or by impact There is no known case on which there is evidence that an Ansul extinguisher was made inoperative as a result of packing A simple procedure to determine which condition exists is the Underwriters Laboratories four inch drop to a clean hard surface test If the lumps do not break up into individual particles caking is present COMPONENT Dry Chemical Pick Up Tube Nameplate s Nitrogen Cylinder s DISORDER Obstructed Unreadable wording Loose Missing Rust spots pits and corrosion deposits Dents or abrasions Paint peeling Safety shipping cap threads on cylinder nicked cross threaded corroded or worn
75. 7440 sis d tutte i RAE 20 10069 Shell Assy 20040 18 43 7444 SOCKEt etus 1 97 10108 A Yoke Asyl Ds 1 07 7450 Handle iib pee uber 7 20 10125 Cable Assy 37 1 2 26 80 7450 Handle Plate 3 60 10125 Cable Assy 33 1 2 26 80 7450 M Marine 7 20 10138 Nut amp Lock Washer 30 7450 MA Marine Handle Plate 3 60 10320 Reflector 9 00 7452 A Auto Wire amp Plug 10 80 10353 ENEE 5 47 7452 M Marine Wire amp Plug 13 50 10369 10 300 18 43 7453 Switch AE 3 23 10370 Head Assy 10 300 70 00 7456 Wire amp Plug atte 9 00 10465 Re c a er 3 33 7478 Shell Assy 740 18 43 10466 7501 L Body eater et 7 57 10467 7501 R Body Right 7 57 10468 7502 A Spring Assy 1 63 10617 7505 Spacer Rubber 47 10635 7554 WITCH a n l eris 2 27 10667 7557 8 1 3 Koiled Kord amp 10669 Plug ASSY echte 15 10 20051 7558 12 1 2 Koiled Kord amp 20052 Plug ASSY iisisti 21 30 20053 7564 Cord Set nennen 7 93 20056 Clamp Bracket 2 70 7852 Ground Will es 1 50 20058
76. 8 15 6 S 52856 19 S 52917 3 S 52920 1 S 63087 8 5 1 S 63087 18 9 9 1 TM 5 4210 228 14 amp P 1 NUMERICAL INDEX ANSUL PAGE FIG FSCM VENDOR PART NO NO NO PART NO S52806 1 52 05018 11 1 52 P5041 23 1 61 05005 24 1 61 10009 8 1 85 0314f0 26 10 02975 7 10 04542 22 10 04543 21 10 04545 25 10 04547 27 10 04555 10 10558 16 01029 TYPE 3 4 A MOD BIITT 10935 20 10994 13 11160 1 11160 11161 4 11163 14 11171 5 11177 3 11173 6 11200 12 11300 12 11301 11 11302 15 1132 3 11322 8 21 1 1133 22 1133 19 11389 2 11391 18 11392 17 11453 16 11453 7 1188 8 19 13 1188 26 1196 12364 13 1238 9 1238 8 26 8 1239 11 12531 1 12549 8 6 44 12743 8 9 30 12744 3 12744 8 9 35 12747 8 9 29 12772 10 01029 TYPE D14 TT 12793 8 15 10 12819 8 6 45 9 2 TM 5 4210 228 14 amp P 1 NUMERICAL INDEX ANSUL PAGE FIG FSCM VENDOR PART NO NO NO PART NO 12824 15 12824 12829 2 13057 46 13331 7 133331 18 13336 23 13363 13770 8 13797 15 06023 3127 TYPEH 13901 10 13903 9 14035 1 14206 57 14232 9 14235 17 14316 14617 28 14626 11 14732 18 14798 32 14928 66 14928 11 14928 40 14929 65 14929 5 14929 10 14929 39 15053 16 15476 33 15989 15989 20 15989 22 15990 18 15990 21 15999 14 15999 6 15999 14 160 32 16059 40 16059 34 16067 41 16067 35 16091 30 16118 38 16119 28 16119 11 16119 20 16121 27 16121 12 16145 16 9 3 TM 5 4210 228 14 amp P 1 NUMERICAL INDEX ANSUL PAGE FIG FSCM VENDOR
77. 8A107 100K ohm 5 100A262 Electrolytic 100K ohm 100A222 C9 10 0 0068 UF Mylar 107A413 10K ohm 100A207 C11 22 0 47 UF Mylar 107B405 27K ohm 100A254 C12 17 0 005 UF 107A211 47K ohm 100A228 Ceramic Disc 2 7K ohm 100A206 C15 0 1 UF Mylar 107A406 2 7K ohm 596 100A256 C18 0 05 UF 107A214 5K ohm 105A204 Ceramic Disc potentiometer C23 0 22 UF Mylar 107A414 4 7K ohm 100A224 C24 0 47 UF Mylar 107A405 1 68K ohm 596 100A261 22K ohm 596 100A259 DIODES 500 ohm 105A212 potentiometer CR1 2 3 4 5 T151 115B101 270K ohm 100A227 CR6 1 Amp Rectifier 115B301 22K ohm 100A208 TRANSFORMERS 50K ohm 106A105 potentiometer T1 Transformer 120B123 3 3K ohm 100A209 T2 Driver Transf 120B125 10 ohm 100A251 T3 Output Transf 120B124 1 8K ohm 2 watt 100A339 120 ohm 596 2 watt 103A105 SWITCHES 1 0 ohm 1 watt 103A101 0 05 ohm 5watt 103A208 1 Push button SIREN 122A117 220 ohm 100A219 S2 Rotary SELECTOR 122840 3 3K ohm 2 watt 100A340 S3 Slide 122B119 S4 ON OFF Part of R38 106AI05 Unless otherwise specified all RESISTORS are in ohms MISCELLANEOUS 1096 1 4 watt P1 Microphone connector 139B134 TRANSISTORS P2 6 Pin Jones Plug 140B113 P3 8 Pin Jones Plug 140B114 2N2925 125C119 F1 Fuse 15 ampere 148A107 DS1 Pilot lamp 53 149B101 0131 PUT 125C310 Fuseholder 143A106 RCA 40316 Driver 125B410 Knob Volume Control 141A102 2N1560 Motorola 1258403 Knob Function Switch 141A103 only Pilot lamp holder 147A104 Blocking 125B406 and je
78. 9 19833 5 19833 22 19836 30 19839 8 11 22 19841 28 19843 35 19849 33 19852 8 11 21 19853 8 11 13 19853 15 19853 19 19853 8 11 20 19854 8 5 37 19857 34 19858 12 19861 7 19864 8 5 32 19872 27 19873 29 19874 37 19897 8 25 12 19920 8 7 19921 19922 8 6 67 19922 8 6 68 19930 18 6 69 19931 8 6 70 19939 10 19950 81 19956 8 5 5 19974 11 19980 36 19982 9 19985 8 25 11 19992 8 9 18 19992 17 19993 8 9 11 19993 32 19995 8 9 17 9 6 TM 5 4210 228 14 amp P 1 NUMERICAL INDEX ANSUL PAGE FIG FSCM VENDOR PART NO NO NO PART NO 2018 5 2018 26 2039 30 2069 43 2078 51 2102 14 2124 25 2146 8 9 6 22440 14 22522 32 92029 208 2284 8 9 28 2367 8 9 13 2367 8 2396 9 2437 12 2437 8 15 14 24380 12 24380 2462 8 9 19 2462 8 9 21 2462 8 9 22 24765 33 25054 1 25146 6 25324 2 2534 14 2537 15 2546 10 2550 7 2554 15 2559 25 2560 59 2585 27 81865 790 2590 12 2600 9 81865 BR B790 TTeX 2629 1 2666 27 2666 8 27517 20 27519 19 27857 17 2918 10 29345 19 29347 21 29347 14 86185 200 2987 8 6 80 2987 8 6 81 2987 20 30393 7 30784 8 30784 17 9 7 TM 5 4210 228 14 amp P 1 NUMERICAL INDEX ANSUL PAGE FIG FSCM VENDOR PART NO NO NO PART NO 30786 5 30858 83 32n91 14 32342 6 32747 32748 32749 4 32750 1 32759 11 32763 5 3394 1 3459 3 3460 1 3461 2 3461 3 3855 16 4065 3 4070 74 4108 12 4135 25 4135 6 4141 26 414
79. A Ansul Part No S 52531 A6 TM 5 4210 228 14 amp P 1 PRICE 2 00 y SIGNAL DIVISION Federal Signal Corporation MODELS PA2050 amp PA2100 SIRACOM II SIREN CONTROL SYSTEM 2060 a CQ yat ANUAL GE MAS Y via l ans wait YELP 40 SIREN Spi ECTUR INSTALLATION AND SERVICE INSTRUCTIONS NOTE TM 5 4210 228 14 amp P 1 This service manual describes the PA2100 However the PA2050 and PA2100 are identical except the PA2050 does not have provision for accommodating the optional lighted pushbutton switches Therefore all descriptions specifications and service data apply equally to both models gt A A Warranty tive material and workmanship corrected at no cost to you for fabor and material viced or modified at any facility other than our factory DEE sale of our electronic sirens d d d A Een OSOS The Federal Signal Corporation warrants each of its new electronic sirens to be free from defective material and workmanship for a period of one yaar from date of purchase Federal Signal Corporation will remedy any defect which under normal installation and operation discloses such defect provided the unit is delivered transportation prepaid by owner to our factory for examination and such examination reveals that in our judgment a defect in material and or workmanship exists n all cases Federal Signal Corporation will be sole judge of
80. CH 6 4 mm MAY RESULT IN ACTUATION OF THE VALVE d Engage and secure cap nut to anchor stud Remove safety plug from cylinder valve s retain plug s for future use CAUTION Do not place your body or head in front of cylinder valve outlet If valve is accidentally operated velocity of unrestricted escaping gas is forceful enough to cause injury especially about the face and head Connect high pressure hose to cylinder valve s wrench tighten CAUTION Do not strike Pull lever when connecting hose to cylinder valve 4 13 TM 5 4210 228 14 amp P 1 RECHARGE INSTRUCTIONS 5 4210 228 14 amp 1 RECHARGE INSTRUCTIONS 39 Make certain visual inspection seal s at cylinder valve s are still intact Replace any broken or missing visual inspection seal s Ansul Part No 197 40 Return dry chemical tank valve handles to operating position a RED Tank Valve OPEN b GREEN Vent Valve CLOSED c BLUE Hose Clean Out Valve CLOSED 5 4210 228 14 amp P 1 RECHARGE INSTRUCTIONS d BLACK Dry Chemical Valve OPEN 41 Insert ring pin s through valve handle s into bracket s and seal with visual inspection seal s Ansul Part No 15999 42 Return Ansul AFFF solution tank valve handles to operating position a GREEN Vent Valve CLOSED b BLUE Hose Clean Out Valve CLOSED 4 15 TM 5 4210 228 14 amp P 1 RECHARGE INSTRUCTIONS c BLACK AFFF Valve OPEN 43 Insert ring pin s
81. CO control point IC104 5 As the control voltage at IC104 5 increases the frequency of the output of IC104 decreases Conversely as the control voltage decreases the output frequency increases The output signal from 1C1043 is applied to the 2 Circuit at IC105A 13 The 2 Circuit IC105A is a toggle flip flop that divides the pulse frequency by 2 The symmetrical output from this circuit is present at IC105A 15 When the siren operator turns off the WAIL tone the timing capacitor C106 begins discharging toward zero volts However C106 is connected through CR105 and R109 to the regulated supply of Q101 As a result C106 does not completely discharge to zero volts Consequently the residual charge on C106 is applied to Q101 and IC103B applying a constant level control voltage to 1C104 5 Simultaneously Q101 also applies a sample of the voltage on C106 to the VCO Control Point IC103A 5 When the voltage at IC103A 5 becomes less positive than the fixed voltage at IC103A 6 IC1O3A 7 goes low This low resets the 2 Circuit preventing the constant level control voltage at IC 104 5 from allowing the VCO to generate an annoying and false constant frequency tone C YELP When SW301 is set to YELP the operation of the circuitry is similar to WAIL except that C106 charges through CR106 and R104 and discharges through R126 and IC101C The charge and discharge rate of C106 is more rapid in YELP than in WAIL Consequently the control vol
82. Courroie d entrainement K1200 Lors de tension de la courroie d viser la vis qui maintient le bras de decoupage en tour nant dans le sens des aiguilles d une montre alaide de la clef douille qui fait partie du jeu d outils et faire tourner le disque d cou peur de quelques tours la main Lorsque la vis est d serr e quelque peu la courroie est tendue par intermediaire du tendeur automatique de courroie 16 TM 5 4210 228 14 amp P 1 D Byte av drivrem K1200 Vid byte av drivremmen demonteras de bada pa kaparmen Lossa skruven vid len som haller kaparmen Replacing the vee belt K1200 To replace the belt remove both the casings on the cutting arm Loosen the screw at the arrow holding the cutting arm Austausch des Antriebsriemens K1200 Bei einem Austausch des Antriebsriemens sind die beiden Gehause am Trennarm abzu nehmen Die Schraube am Pfeil die den Trennarm halt losen Remplacement de la courroie K1200 Lors du remplacement de la courroie Il faut d monter les deux couvercles qui se trou vent sur le bras de decoupage Deviser la vis la fl che qui maintient le bras decoupage TM 5 4210 228 14 amp P 1 d Vridexcentern moturs med tandstiftsnyckeln att fjaderbelastningen slapps Darefter kan kaparmen tryckas tillbaka s att dr vremmen kan tagas av Turn the eccentric counter clockwise by using the spark plug wrench so that the ten sion on the spr
83. D N 7 1 POLE DOUBLE THROW TOGGLE SWITCH SOLENOID RELAY SWITCH 8226 255 6Y 8226A255 1 12V WIRING OF SIREN CONTROL THRU HORN RING ON VEHICLES WITHOUT HORN RELAY BRAKE SWITCH 2 SIREN TO BATTERY T IF USED M BRAKE mawan u us aC Omm mmm u ss I LIGHT SWITCH __ TO BATTERY IF USED LIGHT TO BATTERY Ss TERMINAL MARKED HORN BUTTON RE xe nd HORN 8226A255 6 8226A255 10 12 V y POLE DOUBLE THROW TOGGLE SWITCH WIRING OF SIREN CONTROL THRU HORN RING ON VEHICLES WITH HORN RELAY 8215A439 CHG A 3807 The enclosed cable is designed to inter connect the Interceptor with a two way radio It is designed to work with a variety of makes and models and may be used when separate microphones are used for the Interceptor and the two way radio or when a common microphone is used for the Interceptor and the two way radio 1 If separate microphones are used for the Interceptor and the two way radio and it is desired to monitor in coming radio calls thru the Interceptor connect the Red and Green leads of the cable to the speaker leads of the two way radio Tape the ends of the other four leads of the cable Plug the six pin connector on the other end of the cable into the connector on the rear of the Interceptor Turn the knob marked SELECTOR to the RADIO position to monitor radio calls 2 If common microphone
84. Das Filter mehrere Male eintauchen und es nach jedem hart auswringen Wenn das Filter grundlich gereinigt ist mu es eingeolt werden Ein GefaB mit SAE 30 Ol fullen das Filter ganz in das Ol eintauchen und mehre re Male auswringen Danach das Filter her ausnehmen und von uberflussigem Ol be freien Ein Hauptfilter darf nicht mehr als 5 Mal gewaschen werden WICHTIG Falsche Pflege oder mangelhafte Wasche des Filters kann zu ernsthaften Mo torschaden fuhren Nettoyage du filtre principal peut tre effec tue au p trole ou l essence Le filtre est plong plusieurs fois dans un tel bain pour tre ensuite presse afin de faire sortir les impurites Lorsque le filtre est bien propre faut l huiler comme suit Remplir un r ci pient d huile SAE30 et plonger enti rement le filtre pour ensuite le presser plusieurs fois Le filtre doit ensuite tre sorti du bain et l huile superflue doit tre vacu e Un filtre ne doit pas tre lav plus de 5 fois Remarque Un mauvais entretien du filtre ou un lavage d fectueux peut donner lieu de graves perturbations dans le moteur Kzee Luftfilter K1200 Filtersystemet bestar av forfilter 1 huvud filter 2 och spillfilter 3 Spillfiltret skall en dast bytas p behorig verkstad Forfiltret kan bytas utan verktyg och ar latt att rent Det skyddar huvudfiltret fran att satta igen sig alltfor snabbt Air filter K1200 The air filter systems consists of a pre filter 1
85. F Body Repair Tools and Equipment except Hose and Chain are guaranteed against defects in materials and workmanship Hydraulic Jacks have a warranty period of ninety days See War ranty Card Enclosed with each Jack Tools and Equipment that have been used beyond capacity abused or used for other than their intended purpose are not covered by this Guarantee PF H K PORTER INC SOMERVILLE MASSACHUSETTS 02143 No A128 Printed in U S A Revised 6 74 Ansul Part Number S 27771 Contents Quantity 1 A A po oo oo nM Part No BU0480 BU0190 BU0238 BU0287 BU0580 BU0581 BU0586 BU070 BU0705 BU0725 BU0731 BU0750 BU0775 BU0904 BU0905 BU0906 BU0907 BU0910 BU0911 BU0912 BU0913 BU0931 SL0001 SL0002 SL0004 SL0006 SL0007 SL0008 SL0009 SL0012 Description 10 ton remote control jack 6 ram travel 3 8 NPTF Bite tite clamp Pull arm assembly Chain pull collar Flat push plate Cleated push plate Cleated ram base Rubber anchor Small rubber base Short Nipple Heavy Duty Coupling Spreader Pull Guide Jack spreading toe Jack piston spreading toe V pushing cap Offset spreading toe Small chain attachment 6 chain 3 8 dia links Long spreading toe V notch cap Short chain with 2 hooks Male adaptors Female adaptor 4 extension tube 6 extension tube Connecting pins 8 extension tube Tubing connectors 12 extension tube Quantity Part
86. F premix system into service it is recommended that the following measurements be taken 1 Measurement of concentrate refractive index 2 Generation of the refractive index versus per cent concentration curve 3 Determination of quality of water The procedure for determining concentrate refractive index is described on Pages 3 4 By submitting the concentrate s batch number to The Ansul Company the initial refractive index can be obtained The generation of the refractive index versus per cent concentration curve is illustrated on Page 11 Ansul AFFF 3 or 6 Premix Solution Quality of Sample 1 Remove fill cap from Ansul AFFF solution tank 2 Stir solution vigorously for 30 seconds using a non metallic rod TM 5 4210 228 14 amp P 1 TEST PROCEDURES ANSUL AFFF CONCENTRATE 40mi TEST PROCEDURES PREMIXED ANSUL AFFF Determining water quality consists of examining a sample of the water for residue and or sediment Let the water stand in its container for 5 minutes and then record the appearance and amount of any residue This would help you avoid unnecessary concern with the me residue during future premix inspections three of the above test results should of course be recorded on the inspection sheet Periodic Inspection described on Pages 7 10 the periodic inspections Involve the following tests Quality of Sample Measurement of Per Cent Concentration Measurement of Film Formation and Sealability
87. Hose Reel s DISORDER Operating handle loose Operating handle binding or immovable Leaking nozzle plugged tip and or discharge passage Threads nicked worn or cross threaded Gasket s or 0 ring s brittle compression set cracked cut or missing Dents or abrasions Rust spots pits corrosion deposits or peeling paint Reel binding or stiff operating Reel immovable Pressure leakage TM 5 4210 228 14 amp P 1 SERVICE AND REPAIR CORRECTIVE ACTION Adjust securement screw by tightening See Leaking Nozzle below Disassemble and clean deposits from internal passages and parts with small stiff bristle brush examine gaskets and 0 rings and replace if cut checked deformed stiff brittle or worn Reassemble nozzle and pressure test at 220 PSI Replace thread bearing component barrel valve body or adaptor Replace lubricating gasket s or O ring s light ly with a good grade of high heat resistant grease before insertion Repair affected area of item clean and repaint using a primer and finish coat replace individ ual item if damage interferes with operation Clean corroded areas with a wire brush re place any item seriously weakened by corro sion penetration and repaint using a primer and finish coat Oil inlet body bearing s and grease pinion gear Disassemble inlet swing joint assembly ies clean deposits from internal passages with a stiff brass or bristle brush replace g
88. INSTRUCTIONS TM 5 4210 228 14 amp P 1 ASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS b BLUE Hose Clean Out Valve CLOSED c BLACK AFFF Valve OPEN 22 Repose any broken or missing visual inspection seal s Ansul Part No 15999 23 Unlock hose reel 24 Install turret nozzles 25 Swing turret vertically and horizontally to check freedom of movement 26 Make certain both turret valves operating controls are in the closed position 27 Install cartridge in dashboard actuator a Pull out actuator button and insert ring pin to assure safe cartridge installation TM 5 4210 228 14 amp P 1 ASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS TM 5 4210 228 14 amp P 1 ASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS b Remove safety shipping cap from cartridge Weigh cartridge Replace if weight is 1 4 ounce 7 1 9 or more below weight stamped on cartridge NOTE Use cartridge Ansul Part No 24380 only c Screw cartridge into actuator hand tighten d Seal the ring pin to actuator stem with visual inspection seal Ansul Part No 15999 28 Install cartridge in remote actuator a Pull ring pin and remove guard 2 10 TM 5 4210 228 14 amp P 1 ASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS b Remove safety shipping cap from cartridge Weigh cartridge Replace if weight is 1 4 ounce 7 1 g or more below weight stamped on cartridge NOTE Use cartridge Ansul Part No 24380 only c Raise puncture lever to assure safe cartridge installation d Screw cartridge into actuator hand ti
89. Measurement of Expansion AWIN E Quality of Sample Continued 3 Use only clean dry apparatus to extract and contain solution sample If doubtful clean apparatus with detergent Alconox rinse well and dry 4 Extract 1 quart of solution from a depth of at least 6 inches below liquid level and replace fill cap 5 Let the sample sit for about five minutes then look for stratification sediment or sludge If more than 1 96 by volume of sediment or sludge is found you should replace the premix solution However any sludge or sediment that was introduced with the water in the premixing process may be disregarded Refer to your records for information about the sludge or sediment content of the water originally used 6 If the sludge or sediment content of the sample is found to be unacceptable clean all the sampling equipment carefully and repeat Steps 2 through 5 to verify your findings Measurement of Concentration This test should be performed three times with the result averaged to obtain the figure for the Field Inspection Record entry 1 Hold your TS Meter in a horizontal position swing the cover plate over the body of the instrument to expose both the prism and the cover plate surface clean if required and place a small sample of the premix solution on the measuring prism NOTE Use plastic pipette to minimize the possibility of scratching the prism surface by the contact with the pipette tip 2
90. NAL OF 1 VRMS AT 1 KHz GAIN CONTROL SET AT APPROXIMATEL MID POINT Q11 13 2 VDC 0 0 VDC 13 0 VDC 0 18 VAC 7 4 VAC 0 4 VAC Q12 13 6 VDC 13 6 VDC 13 2 VDC 0 0 VAC 0 0 VAC 0 0 VAC 13 Table 2 Troubleshooting Chart TROUBLE Fuse blows No siren in any position Radio and P A function normally No siren Unit chirps in YELP position Little or no volume in all positions Low output in all positions Little or no volume in RADIO position P A is OK Little or no output when magnetic microphone is used No output from carbon or transistorized microphone No HI LO All other tones OK No radio or P A Siren tones OK Steady tone in all siren positions except MANUAL and HI LO WAIL tone falls only Manual tone only when SIREN button is held does not coast down but stops immediately when SIREN button is released WAIL tone rises to steady tone and holds All other tones OK YELP tone falls only All other tones OK Steady tone in YELP position All other tones OK In MANUAL position siren emits a steady or intermittent tone even though auxiliary switch horn ring or foot is not operated Excessive noise in P A position only Buzz in loudspeaker when engine or radio is operated Short siren blast in MANUAL position Sometimes heard when vehicle is being started Frequency of siren affected by flashing lights 14 TM 5 4210 2228 14 amp P 1 PROBABLE CAUSE One or more output transistors Q10 Q11 defect
91. ND ALTERNATING FLASHER 29041135 B ON OVERRIDE JU702 TO A OFF OVERRIDE TO FLA IN TO BATTERY GROUND 4204113585 Figure 6 13 Control Module Optional Flasher Circuit Board Parts Location Diagram 27 Schematic Symbol R101 121 122 123 125 134 136 137 140 141 154 155 156 R102 109 114 115 118 120 R103 R104 R105 R106 107 119 R108 R110 R111 112 126 R113 116 R124 R127 R128 R129 R130 R131 R132 R133 R135 R138 R139 142 146 148 149 R143 R144 150 R145 R147 R151 R152 R153 R157 R158 R159 161 162 R160 R163 164 R165 RT101 C101 104 107 109 C102 110 112 117 C103 111 116 121 122 Schematic Symbol R201 R202 R204 205 C201 CR201 CR202 203 204 205 206 207 208 DS201 202 SW201 SW301D E J201 202 P201 202 CR501 509 513 515 K501 502 503 SW501 Description RESISTORS 10K Ohm 1K Ohm 2 1 8K Ohm 1 8K Ohm 596 5 6K Ohm 296 30K Ohm 2 22K Ohm 330 Ohm 100K Ohm 220K Ohm 2 100 Ohm 8 2K Ohm 2 12K Ohm 2 56K Ohm 2 56 Ohm Y Watt 3 9K Ohm 2 2K Ohm 680 Ohm 680 Ohm Watt 47K Ohm 1K Ohm Potentiometer 5K Ohm 10 Ohm 6 8 Ohm 33K Ohm 27 Ohm 596 8 2 Ohm 5 270 OhM 2 Watt WW 8 2K Ohm Potentiometer 1000hm 39 Ohm 4 7K Ohm Watt 47 Ohm 2 Watt WW 100K Ohm Thermistor 200 Ohm Unless otherwise specified all risistors are carbon composition 10 watt CAPACITORS 001UF 500V disc
92. NIT AIR RELEASE AND OIL FILLER VALVE INSTRUCTIONS TO OPERATE PUMP Turn T valve to right until closed Turn Knurled Knob one full turn to left TO RELEASE PUMP Turn T valve one turn to left WHEN NOT USING PUMP Turn Knurled Knob to right until closed to prevent unit from getting air bound CAUTION Before using make sure BU600 Coupler is tight Connects Hose to Ram SOMERVILLE MASSACHUSETTS 02143 TM 5 4210 228 14 amp P 1 INSTRUCTIONS FOR OIL INSPECTION FILLING AND BLEEDING ALL N JACKS EXCEPT 00300 OIL INSPECTION 1 Open release valve A and fully retract ram B Fig 1 2 Stand pump on tank end Fig 1 remove hex filler screw assembly C If oil flows out of filler hole no additional oil is needed CAUTION Do not fill unit when pump is in horizontal position FILLING INSTRUCTIONS 1 Place pump on bench tank end down Fig 1 Remove hex filler screw assembly C 2 Fill pump with P F Hydraulic Fluid using oil can until oil will flow out filler hole while pump is standing on tank end 3 Replace filler screw C and tighten securely BLEEDING INSTRUCTIONS 1 Place pump in vise at slight angle Fig 2 so that jaws of vise grip tank not pump housing Exert only enough vise pressure to hold pump in position 2 With ram B in lowest position Fig 3 close release valve A Fig 1 turn knurled knob one full turn to left and fully extend ram Hold ram in this position for 1y minutes
93. NITY MANUFACTURING 1260 N CLYBOURN CHICAGO IL 60610 PHONE 312 943 5200 PARTS SHEET Form No 105 6 10 80 SPOTLIGHT ROOFLIGHT DOUBLE HEADER MODEL 6 225 275 MODEL 10300 MODEL H 1 250 U250 1 6598 6579 6778 41650 6779 HI 6565 lt eU IAN Ze 6209 6471 L 70777 3059 u y 6421 6473 6452 6403 A P313 DD 6453 e pe 3926 6140 1834 P 6030 6570 6770 6710 a 65700 67700 6715 A SE HEAD 6424 cw ASSEMBLY 202 F soo 6100 reist 6100 6412 6040 A 3 6029 6428 6750FM 6427 e SUB HANDLE 8100 amp 6710 used for A B H GM U V Length Spotlights ASSEMBLY 6100 H amp 6715 used for C K P F FP N MS OS Length Spotlights 6701 HANDLE 8 HOUSING ASSEMBLY TM 5 4210 228 14 amp P 1 UNTLITE S6 amp Hi 772 SERIES amp 5AG SERIES SEARCHLIGHT 740 742 744 24 0 RV 46 RV 15 1386 1213 1395 1242 A 1292 1240 A MAGNETS 3 1270 UNIRACK I END BRACKET SPR 70A 73A 73B 75A SI TRON AMPLIFIER PC75 A POWER CONTROL SWITCHING CONSOLE d 113 491 5 4 16 1 50M 151 PAGE 2 TM 5 4210 228 14 amp P 1 PART Suggested PART Suggested NUMBER DESCRIPTION LIST PRICE NUMBER DESCRIPTION LIST PRICE 1 528 Radio Audio Cable d 1834 Wedge
94. Nipple Close 1 1 2 Brass Union 1 1 2 Brass Pipe 1 1 2 x 39 Brass Elbow 1 1 2 x 900 Brass Nipple 1 1 2 x 2 1 2 Brass Hose Reel Assembly 8 5 TM 5 4210 228 14 amp P 1 ANSUL TANK AND PIPING LAYOUT Cont ES DESCRIPTION QUANTITY PART NO Nipple Close 1 1 4 Elbow 1 1 4 x 900 Nipple 1 1 4 x 2 i 2 Valve Check 1 1 4 Tee 1 1 4 Bushing Reducing 1 1 4 x 1 4 Union Swivel Adapter 1 1 4 Coupling Reusable 1 1 4 Hose 1 1 2 x 106 Nipple 3 4 x 2 Tee 3 4 Bushing Reducing 3 4 x 1 4 Union Swivel Adapter 3 4 Coupling Reusable 3 4 Hose 3 4 x 148 Plate AFFF Refill Chart Plate AFFF Tank I D Plate Name AFFF Product Valve Pipe 2 x 42 Plate Name D C Product Valve Plate D C Tank 1 D Plate Name D C Relief Valve Bolt Hex Hd 3 8 16NC x 1 1 2 SS Washer Flat 3 8 SS Lockwasher 3 8 SS Nut Hex 3 8 16NC SS Hose Sealtite Metal 12 Lg Hose Sealtite Metal 36 Terminal Solderless Terminal Solderless Elbow Pulling 900 Grommet Guard Plate Patent Plate Name To Operate Plate Name Recharge Plate Name Hose Reel Rewind Switch Plate Name Identification Elbow 1 1 2 x 450 Angle 2 x 2 x 1 4 x 8 Angle 2 x 2 x 1 4 x 7 Elbow 1 1 2 x 450 Brass AA A POH sch sch sch sch sch sch sch P P P P Ap sch AH HP AH sch M py M TM 5 4210 228 14 amp P 1 AN
95. No Bracket 8283C292 Grommet 8108A14 Driver 8283B433 Band Cover Painted 8283A448 Washer Steel 8283A450 Washer Vellutex 8283A451 Gasket 8283A449 Projector 8283C432 Washer Vellutex 8283A453 Washer Rubber 8283A452 11 Cone 8283B430 1 4 29 12 Nameplate 8146A507 3 0 35 Not Voice Coil part of item 3 8287A164 10 80 Shown Visibar Conversion Kit 8422A152 3 95 O Po 7 NI sch L sch sch LO a sch sch N gt DO NOT ORDER PARTS BY INDEX NUMBER Give model voltage description and part number All prices F 0 B Factory Blue Island Illinois All prices subject to change without notice Federal Sign and Signal Corporation Signal Division 136th and Western Avenue Blue Island Illinois 60406 TM 5 4210 228 14 amp P 1 FEDERAL SIGN amp SIGNAL CORP SIGNAL DIVISION IMPORTANT INSTRUCTIONS BRAKE SWITCH IF USED TO BATTERY i TO BATTERY LIGHT SWITCH ro j g r LIGHT IF USED ee Ju NL 1 BATTERY SIREN PUSH BUTTON d OR FOOT SWITCH EN d RELAY SWITCH 8226A255 6V 8226 255 1 12V E TO BATTERY MD Yo SIREN MOTOR TO BATTERY TO SWITCH FEDERAL 5 SIGN amp SIGNAL CORPORATION 8215A439 TM 5 4210 228 14 amp P 1 BRAKE SWITCH Py ois SIREN O BATTERY RSA IF USED n BRAKE ama nuum a Casen oeren es CONES nl incu P os LIGHT SWITCH O BATTERY IF USE
96. OOSEN FOR SIREN MODULE REMOVAL LOOSEN TO REMOVE COVER 29047036 SIREN BUTTON BRACKET SCREW Figure 6 7 PA2100 Bottom View 24 NOTE UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED ALL RESISTORS OHMS 21000 210 1 4 WATT ALL CAPACITORS ARE IN MICROFARADS UF prtesese esnurrennn meannt RELAY CIRCUIT BOARD o 13 5 MA LL Mar Baro CR40 CR403 LED LED R402 R403 470 4TO 0 lo 2 3 SW40ID Y LED CIRCUIT BOARD TM 5 4210 228 148P 1 e50A7040 Figure 6 8 Control Module Internal View FLA FLAFLA 1 2 3 4 IGN RCSPKR SPKR INP OUT OUT RING HORN A B NE E 18701 mas RED 86A f AN gt 21401 ren CN PAZIOO CONTROL E ens MODULE 2900 0148 Figure 6 9 Control Module Schematic Diagram 25 TM 5 4210 228 14 amp P 1 Figure 6 11 Control Module LED Circuit Board Parts Location Diagram 26 TM 5 4210 228 14 amp P 1 LJ H7O TO FLA IN R704 R703 H707 BATTERY R708 100 100K b 5 LA H702 FLA A 43K 5 0 00 CR70I 2 7 S CR7O7 64 R705 22K H703 aa K702 CR703 CR7O6 Q703 2N2925 NOTES Q see UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED Trs 2 y ALL RESISTORS ARE IN OHMS 10 R706 1 4 WATT K 1 000 1198 ON OVERRIDE B 2 2K ALL CAPACITORS ARE IN MICROFARADS ALL DIODES ARE CL I ALL TRANSISTORS AS SPECIFIED H705 OFF OVERRIDE 2 00 H704 BATTERY GROU
97. ORRECTION CHART Ansul A3 TM 5 4210 228 14 amp P 1 TEMPERATURE CORRECTION CHART For Checking Pressure of 400 Cu Ft 11 32 m3 Nitrogen Cylinder Ansul fire suppressing securing systems use compressed nitrogen as the expellant for the extinguishing agents The instructions covering proper inspection and maintenance of this equipment state that the 400 cu ft 11 32 m nitrogen cylinders should be replaced with fully charged cylinders if the pressure is less than 1750 PSI 12064 kPa at 70 F 21 C However the pressure in the nitrogen cylinder varies with changes in temperature Accordingly the chart below has been prepared to assist users of Ansul equipment in determining that the cylinder being checked contains enough nitrogen to furnish a recommended operating pressure CYLINDER PRESSURE PSI kPa 2100 14477 KA AU lt lt lt eebe 2000 gt D d 0050556050545 dE gt gt gt DX gt GE 1700 1600 11030 1500 10341 RR 1400 1300 fi 65 40 20 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 150 540 400 28 9 17 8 6 7 4 4 156 26 7 37 8 48 9 656 NITROGEN CYLINDER TEMPERATURE Examples 1 The nitrogen cylinder on an Ansul fire suppressing securing system indicates a pressure of 1800 PSI 12064 kPa on the pressure gauge The temperature of the cylinder is 800 F 26 70 C Reference to the chart shows that this is above the temperature correction line and t
98. PART NO NO NO PARTNO 16150 8 6 75 16151 8 1 30 16153 22 16154 23 16156 21 16157 8 7 85 16158 8 5 27 16159 8 6 53 16159 6 16186 1 26 16186 1 1626 18 9 8 16267 8 9 33 16278 8 6 41 16279 8 9 4 16282 26 16322 8 9 34 16336 18 16396 8 5 6 16460 8 25 10 16470 1 16477 16 16512 8 6 63 16513 21 16515 37 16554 8 9 38 16554 33 16592 8 6 72 16618 8 6 64 16618 4 16707 16794 8 5 15 16795 8 5 14 1689 25 17188 8 9 17227 8 9 39 17227 36 17229 9 17242 17243 7 17245 8 26 3 17252 1732 11 90526 MAV 2P 17473 22 17486 26 17556 2 17586 13 1765 8 6 50 1770 8 6 52 17753 16 181 8 19 6 9 4 TM 5 4210 228 14 amp P 1 NUMERICAL INDEX ANSUL PAGE FIG FSCM VENDOR PART NO NO NO PART NO 181 12 18105 24 18107 23 18107 20 1845 7 1901 18 19070 1 19105 24 19109 34 19112 17 19116 25 19124 6 19124 9 19147 76 19149 61 19150 31 19169 23 19181 82 19183 37 19185 13 19253 97542 EAD 29 14 19 19364 2 19406 7 19407 29 19407 3 19410 73 19415 13 19428 24 19444 3 19479 24 19516 9 19557 5 19558 4 19559 2 19563 78 19576 28 19577 29 19578 8 19578 24 19578 30 19599 15 19606 49 19608 48 19609 47 19609 31 19610 55 19611 54 19620 33 19651 6 96463 S 4525 19661 8 23 15 9 5 TM 5 4210 228 14 amp P 1 NUMERICAL INDEX ANSUL PAGE FIG FSCM VENDOR PART NO NO NO PART NO 19662 8 23 16 19663 8 23 19 19664 8 23 9 19686 2 197 8 19729 2 19765 17 19780 21 19825 9 19826 38 19829 8 38 19830 8 5 3
99. PHONE NUMBER SIGN HERE DA EM 2028 2 PREVIOUS EDITIONS P S IF YOUR OUTFIT WANTS TO KNOW ABOUT YOUR JUL 79 ARE OBSOLETE RECOMMENDATION MAKE A CARBON COPY OF THIS AND GIVE IT TO YOUR HEADQUARTERS The Metric System and Equivalents Linear Measure 1 centimeter 10 millimeters 39 inch 1 decimeter 10 centimeters 3 94 inches 1 meter 10 decimeters 39 37 inches 1 dekameter 10 meters 32 8 feet 1 hectometer 10 dekameters 328 08 feet 1 kilometer 10 hectometers 3 280 8 feet Weights 1 centigram 10 milligrams 15 grain 1 decigram 10 centigrams 1 54 grains 1 gram z 10 decigram z 035 ounce 1 decagram 10 grams 35 ounce 1 hectogram z 10 decagrams z 3 52 ounces 1 kilogram 10 hectograms 2 2 pounds 1 quintal 100 kilograms 220 46 pounds 1 metric ton 10 quintals 1 1 short tons Liquid Measure 1 centiliter 10 milliliters 34 fl ounce 1 deciliter 10 centiliters 3 38 fl ounces 1 liter 10 deciliters 33 81 fl ounces 1 dekaliter 10 liters 2 64 gallons 1 hectoliter 10 dekaliters 26 42 gallons 1 kiloliter 10 hectoliters 264 18 gallons Square Measure 1 sq centimeter 100 sq millimeters 155 sq inch 1 sq decimeter 100 sq centimeters 15 5 sq inches 1 sq meter centare 100 sq decimeters 10 76 sq feet 1 sq dekameter are 100 sq meters 1 076 4 sq feet 1 sq hectometer hectare 100 sq dekameters 2 47 acres 1 sq kilometer 10
100. R PANEL OF SIRACOM CONTROL MODULE ga 29041021 Figure 3 4 TS200 NOTE Refer to Section IV for a description of the operation of the PA override and common microphone features The PA 2100 can be easily set for operation in either of these modes If required the mode of operation can be changed at a future date A PA Override Connections In order to take advantage of the PA override feature separate microphones are required for the two way radio and the siren PA function If PA override operation with rebroadcast of radio messages is desired proceed as follows sed figure 3 5 1 Slide the Siren Module from the PA 2100 chassis 2 Slide the optional FN900 Adapter Module into the Adapter Module Channel 3 Start the sheet metal screw provided through the hole in the channel and into the hole in the bottom of the Adapter Module 4 Replace the Siren Module in the PA 2100 chassis Make sure that the connector on the Siren Module mates properly with the connector on the Adapter Module Tighten the sheet metal screw that was inserted in step 3 8 TM 5 4210 228 14 amp P 1 ADAPTER MODUL SIREN MODULE CRAS ADAPTER MODULE CHANNEL 29041029 Figure 3 5 Adapter Module Installation 5 Connect the brown zip cord across ire two way radio s speaker voice coil terminals 6 Plug the Model MNCT Microphone into the Adapter Module The PA 2100 is now set for PA override operation B Common M
101. RONIC SIREN SERIES 2E TM 5 4210 228 14 amp P 1 E Y Warranty The Federal Sign and Signal Corporation warrants each of its new electronic sirens to be free from defective material and workmanship for a period of one year from date of purchase Federal Sign and Signal Corporation will remedy any defect which under normal installation and operation discloses such defect provided the unit is delivered transportation prepaid by owner to our factory for examination and such examination reveals that in our judgment a defect in material and or workmanship exists In all cases Federal Sign and Signal Corporation will be sole judge of what constitutes defective matenal and workmanship Defects of workmanship and material under this warranty will be corrected at WWWWWWWWWWWMWWWWWWWVW A e N d N no cost to you for labor and material lt This warranty does not extend to any electronic siren which has been subjected to abuse misuse improper installation or violation of any instructions c supplied by us nor extended to units which have been serviced or modified at gt facility other than our factory PE This warranty takes precedence over all other warrant es expressed or implied P lt no representative or other person is authorized to assume for Federal Sign gt lt gt Signal Corporation any other liability in connection with t
102. S 2 70 6122 A 4 97 1003A Drill Bushing 137 6123 BUSNING ren ee ee ran 1 80 1044 Nub co ite e 13 6140 Bine ee 13 1045 VELIE 07 6141 B SGFOW eH 20 1056 Body siepe ERIS 12 97 6151 Toggle Assy 1 80 1060 Lens 7 201 10 Amber 6209 MU ORE ME EH 17 Blue Red 8 50 6350 GE Ee 30 1062 Boll 2 70 6403 Headpost Assy 5 77 1213 Dome for RV 15 Amber 6405 Gears nena tds 1 73 Blue Clear Red 15 73 6412 SOreW 55 eei nee een 13 1240A Base for DVIb 7 13 6421 ET le EE 1 97 1242 A Ring Assy RV1 5 5 40 6424 sms 1 27 1245 Dome for RV25 Amber 6427 Rod Gear See Note 8 10 Blue Clear 21 43 6428 Tube See Note 3 23 1245 5 Spitfire Dome 6441 STEW be ed ase 17 Blue or Red RV25 39 13 6450FM Upper amp Lower Handle Black 2 87 1246 Gasket RV25 1 30 6452 Wire 63 1260 A Base for RV25 40 07 6453 SW amp Will se 4 67 1265 Motor for RV5 6 50 00 6471 S une ui eir ESAMI 20 1270 Magnet RV15 3 90 ea 6473 A a eve UN 17 1282 Dome RV26 45 amp 46 6565U Ring Assy 22
103. S AND RECOMMENDING IMPROVEMENTS You can help improve this manual If you find any mistake or if you know of a way to improve the procedures please let us know Mail your letter DA Form 2028 Recommend Changes to Publications and Blank Forms or DA Form 2028 2 located in the back of this manual direct to Commander U S Army Troop Support Command ATTN AMSTR MCTS 4300 Goodfellow Boulevard St Louis MO 63120 1798 A reply will be furnished directly to you REPORTING EQUIPMENT IMPROVEMENTS EIR s If the Fire Fighting Truck needs improvement let us know Send us an EIR You the user are the only one who can tell us what you do not like about your equipment Let us know why you do not like the design or performance Put it on an SF 368 Quality Deficiency Report Mail it to us at US Army Troop Support Command ATTN AMSTR QX 4300 Goodfellow Blvd St Louis MO 63120 1798 We will send you a reply TM 5 4210 228 14 amp 1 SECTION 1 INTRODUCTION MANUAL SCOPE This manual is intended for use with the Ansul Twin Agent Fire Fighting Truck Those who operate recharge inspect or maintain this fire suppressing securing vehicle should read this entire manual Specific sections will be of particular interest depending upon one s responsibilities The purpose of this manual is to familiarize personnel with the operation and maintenance of the twin agent fire fighting truck The operator of the fire fighting truck is responsible for all minor m
104. SUL TANK AND PIPING LAYOUT Cont rs DESCRIPTION QUANTITY PART NO 83 1 Bolt U Plate Name SrAFFF Relief Valve Union Swivel Adapter 1 1 2 Brass Twin Turret Handle and Tie Rod Assembly Not Shown Hand Valve and Pneumatic Actuator Assembly Not Shown Grommet For Actuation Line Through Firewall Not Shown Funnel AFFF Not Shown Tube AFFF Measuring Not Shown Funnel Dry Chemical Not Shown Wire 16 2 24 Lg Not Shown Cable Battery 4 288 Lg Not Shown 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 8 7 TM 5 4210 228 14 amp P 1 ANSUL DRY CHEMICAL TANK ASSEMBLY 17 pi 247 12 22 Lon 4 5 16 9 8 b oH 15 13 7 6 i 2 Last cid 14 Lu TM 5 4210 228 14 amp P 1 ANSUL DRY CHEMICAL TANK ASSEMBLY DESCRIPTION QUANTITY PART NO Dry Chemical Tank Assembly Cap Fill Assembly Gasket Tank assembly Nipple 1 1 4 x 41 2 Valve Safety Tee 1 Bushing Reducing 1 x 1 2 Nipple Close 1 2 Valve Ball Elbow 1 2 x 900 Bracket Nameplate Pin Ring Chain 7 Lg Seal Visual Inspection Rivet Pop 3 16 Rivet Pop Bracket Nameplate Bracket Nameplate Pipe 1 2 x 10 1 4 Lg Tee 1 2 Pipe 1 2 x 18 Lg Pipe 1 2 x 7 1 4 Lg Tee Reducing 1 1 4 x 1 1 4 x 1 2 Nipple 1 1 4 x 4 Elbow 1 1 4 x 900 Nipple Short 1 1 4 Valve Ball Nipple 1 x 5 Elbow 3 x 900 Pipe 3 x 3 1 2 Lg Valve Flanged Ball
105. TM 5 4210 228 14 amp P 1 TECHNICAL MANUAL OPERATOR S ORGANIZATIONAL AND DIRECT SUPPORT MAINTENANCE MANUAL INCLUDING REPAIR PARTS AND SPECIAL TOOLS LIST TRUCK FIRE FIGHTING 4x4 MODEL 1350 PKP 200 AFFF NSN 4210 00 484 5729 ANSUL FIRE PROTECTION HEADQUARTERS DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY 8 JANUARY 1987 TM 5 4210 228 14 amp P 1 TECHNICAL MANUAL TRUCK FIRE FIGHTING 4x4 MODEL 1350 PKP 200 AFFF NSN 4210 00 484 5729 ANSUL FIRE PROTECTION MARINETTE WI 54143 CONTRACT DAAK01 78 C 1667 SERIAL NO IDENTIFICATION NO REGISTRATION NO 001 AR185JHA31567 CH9906 002 AR185KHA17091 CH9907 003 AR185KHA17162 CH9908 004 AR185KHA18569 CH9909 005 AR185KHA18637 CH9910 Part No S 63086 ANSUL ANSUL FIRE PROTECTION MARINETTE WI 54143 TM 5 4210 228 14 amp P 1 CONTENTS SECTIONS PAGE S ere e OA CR E TM PU EE Manual SCOPO u u H Truck Equipment and Fire Extinguishing Securing Systems anna Table of SpeoifiCallOna 0 ts tein ec lua EE 1 6 1 10 Assembly Instructions EE 2 1 2 14 Ee 3 1 3 2 Recharge inc 4 1 5 1 5 10 Section 6 Maintenance ee TEE 6 1 6 22 Service amp Repair 7 8 Section 8 Component 8 1 8 26 Numerical Indes ci ecu etr eite ache ee meets 9 10 Appendix REPORTING ERROR
106. UID HYDRAULIC JACKS amp RAMS PORTER gt ES Available in quarts and gallons TM 5 4210 228 14 amp P 1 TM 5 4210 228 14 amp P 1 d RM d ec dag dp Hydraulic Unit Warranfy Every NEW Hydraulic Unit is guaranteed free from defects in workmanship and material and is guaranteed to give satisfactory service under normal use and maintenance for a period of ninety days from date of delivery to the ori ginal purchaser We will at our option replace or repair without charge any defective unit provided said unit is sent transportation charges prepaid to the nearest Authorized P F Service Station This warranty does not apply to units or com ponent parts broken by accident overload or abuse nor does it apply to units or parts that have failed DUE TO THE USE OF ANY FLUID OTHER THAN HYDRAULIC JACK FLUID Any alterations which affect the operation or condition of the hydraulic unit or any damage from repairs made by other than an Authorized P F amp Service Station will void this warranty This warranty will also be voided by the failure of the original purchaser to return to the com pany within 7 days from date of purchase the registration card enclosed herewith 6 SOMERVILLE MASSACHUSETTS 02143 ADIOS IIS IWS Q OQA CANAD COG EIN CARI CIR CDW LIO CIR CRUS TM 5 4210 228 14 amp P 1 If yours is a RK 0001 RESCUE KIT WITH 4 TON JACK read this folder first before
107. VDC TM 5 4210 228 14 amp P 1 REMOVE _ REMOVE gt 4 2904 038 REMOVE R158 COMPONENT SIDE Figure 6 2 Siren Module Printed Circuit Board Removal Figure 6 3 Siren Module Internal View 21 TM 5 4210 228 14 amp P 1 7 SR y x 133 CL I R IC 8503 05202 E 56 d EE cans D I RI4S CHS amp 8K D SIRACOM PA 21 Ae O12 290610120 4302 FUNCTION FUNCTION kel pel Pin FUNCTION FUNCTION INPUT E SPEAKER OUTPUT 1 wer HIINPUT ar MIKE AUDIO TO 2 ex B INPUT SPEAKER OUTPUT 2 MIKE LO INPUT MIKE OUTPUT Jio INPUT a manual 4 7 RADIO CONTROL MIKE INPUT 7 PA OUTPUT RADIO INPUT 7 AUXILIARY 8 MASTER CONTROL WIKE HI OUTPUT e GROUND i RADIO INPUT Figure 6 4 Siren Module Schematic Diagram 22 TM 5 4210 228 14 amp P 1 JU IOI BRN JU 108 WHT GRA IRIO2 FD cRIO3E5 19 I ke WHT BLK JUI20 ORN Figure 6 5 Siren module Main Circuit Board Parts Location Diagram 23 290810178 NOTE INDICATES COMPONENT OR JUMPER WIRE MOUNTED ON CONDUCTOR SIDE OF BOARD TM 5 4210 228 14 amp P 1 7302 11 4302 12 SW3OIF t 5 3018 2 JU208 PINK SW30IF 2345 6 303 8 P O AND P202 MOUNTED ON CONDUCTOR SIDE OF BOARD Figure 6 6 Siren Module Front Circuit Board Parts Location Diagram 9304 LOOSEN TO REMOVE COVER Q302 L
108. a capillary tubing outlet and adjustment valve will readily provide a 1 inch long pilot flame Measurement of Expansion This test should be performed three times with the result averaged to obtain the figure for the Field Inspection Record entry 1 2 Extract at least 10 ml of the premix solution from one quart sample previously removed from tank Place precisely 10 ml in the 100 ml graduated cylinder TM 5 4210 228 14 amp P 1 TEST PROCEDURES PREMIXED ANSUL AFFF 10mi TM 5 4210 228 14 amp P 1 TEST PROCEDURES ANSUL AFFF CONCENTRATE Place stopper in graduate placing thumb over top of stopper Shake graduate in 90 arc hard and rapidly at least 25 times f any liquid is in evidence below foam bulk reshake Push foam clinging to sides of graduate down into foam bulk with a spatula and read volume at top level of foam Total volume of less than 40 ml corresponds to a foam expansion of less than 4 meaning solution must be replaced 10 USING THE REFRACTIVE PROPORTIONING ACCURACY Developing the Refractive Index Versus Concentration Curve The refractive index of an Ansul AFFF solution can be used to determine premix concentrations or to check the accuracy of proportioning equipment Measurement of the refractive index allows you to determine the per cent Ansul AFFF concentrate in solution with either fresh or salt water The higher the concentrate level the higher the refractive index In fact a stra
109. a commande d acc l ration est enti re ment enfonc e Commande d acc l ration La comman de d acc l ration r gie le r gime du moteur etla vitesse du disque d coupeur Blocage de ralenti Ce blocage emp che toute acc l ration involontaire lorsque le moteur tourne au ralent Lors de travaux avec la machine le blocage est lib r l aide de la main qui maintient la poign e Ratt startstallning och start av maskinen Reglagen skall vara nstallda for start Da maskinen startar borjar kapskivan att rotera Det ar darfor viktigt att sta stadigt samt att se ull att kapskivan kan rotera fritt Drag ut start linan med ett ryck tills dess att motorn star tar Correct starting position and starting of the machine Due to the setting of the throttle the disc will start to rotate as soon as the engine fires so be sure that you and the machine are firmly positioned when starting Pull the starter cord out smartly a few times until the engine starts Vorschriitsma ige Anwerfstellung und Anwerfen der Maschine Zum Anwerfen der Sage mussen alle Regler entsprechend eingestellt sein AuBerdem ist es wichtig da Sie stabil und sicher stehen Das Anwerfseil mit einem kraftigen Buck ein paarmal herausziehen bis der Motor ange sprungen ist Position correcte de d marrage et d marrage de la machine Lorsque les commandes sont en place pour le d marrage l est important de se tenir d une facon bien stable lorsque l
110. a courroie apr s un emploie ayant n cessit 1 ou 2 remplissages de r servoir et contr ler ensuite quotidiennement la ten sion En ce qui concerne l inversion du bras d coupeur voir page 31 11 Sk tsel av kapskivor lakttag forsiktighet vid hantering och forvaring av kapskivor s att de inte skadas Genast efter uppackning av skivorna skall man un dersoka dem noga for att forvissa sig om att deinte blivit skadade vid hanter ng under transport eller av andra orsaker Kapsk vor skall forvaras liggande pa plan yta och pa betryggande avst nd fran stark varme och fukt Ski vorna far inte under lagringen utsattas for hog luft fuktighet vatten och vatskor tempera turer under noll grader Vid transport av kapmaskinen skall kapskivan tagas av och forvaras enligt har givna anvisningar for att forhindra att den skadas Care of cutter discs All cutter discs are breakable and therefore care shall be exercised in their handling and storage to prevent damage Immediately after unpacking ail discs shall be closely inspected to make certain that they have not been damaged from handling shipping or other causes Cutter discs should be laid flat on a flat surface away from excessive heat or moisture Discs should not be stored subjectto exposure to high humidity water other liquids or freezing temperatures Discs used on machines on emergency vehicles should be dismounted after use and discared or carefully stored
111. able from almost any radio or electronics supply outlet The factory can and will service your equipment or provide technical assistance with problems that cannot be handled satisfactorily and promptly locally Address all communications and shipments to Service Department Signal Division Federal Signal Corporation 136th and Western Avenue Blue Island Illinois 60406 If any unit is returned for adjustment or repair it can be accepted only if we are notified by mail or phone in advance of its arrival Such notice should clearly indicate the service requested and give all pertinent information regarding the nature of the malfunction and if possible its cause The following diagrams are provided to assist repair personnel when service to the equipment is required Fig Diagram 6 1 SELECTOR Switch Diagram 6 2 Siren Module Printed Circuit Board Removal 6 3 Siren Module Internal View 6 4 Siren Module Schematic Diagram 6 5 Siren Module Main Circuit Board Parts Location Diagram 6 6 Siren Module Front Circuit Board Parts Location Diagram 6 7 PA2100 Bottom View 6 8 Control Module Internal View 6 9 Control Module Schematic Diagram 6 10 Control Module Relay Circuit Board Parts Location Diagram 6 11 Control Module LED Circuit Board Parts Location Diagram 6 12 Control Module Optional Flasher Board Schematic Diagram 6 13 Control Module Optional Flasher Circuit Board Parts Location Diagram 6 2 SIREN MODULE A General Any competent
112. aid contacts 3 screw terminals Mounting bushing 3 8 dia x 23 64 long Cole Hersee Part Number 95610 Ignition Switch Indicator Light 12 volt Water proof explosion proof heavy duty Single wire lead 16 gauge 8 long Accommodates type G 6 S C bayonet bulb No 67 or No 89 12 volt Gasketed red faceted 15 16 dia lens Mounts through 7 8 dia hole Cole Hersee Part Number PL 39 Manufacturer Cole Hersee 20 Old Colony Avenue Boston Massachusetts 02127 TM 5 4210 228 14 amp P 1 IGNITION SWITCH AND IGNITION SWITCH INDICATOR LIGHT TM 5 4210 228 14 amp P 1 SIERRA COMPANY Crash Rescue Kit CRK5 SIERRA Ansul Part No S 52537 A11 TM 5 4210 228 14 amp P 1 SIERRA AIRCRAFT RESCUE CRASH TOOL KIT Sierra Company Los Angeles CA 90037 Aircraft Cable Cutters 14 inch capacity to 1 4 inch Lineman s Pliers heavy duty 8 inches long Grappling Hook and Rope Sling 40 inches long Hack Saw Frame adjustable 8 to 12 inches 6 Fuel Line Plugs 3 hardwood 3 neoprene Heavy Canvas Roll treated stencil outlined with tool pockets or straps Rescue Knife with V blade will cut 10000 Ib webbing or seat belts Serrated Edge Axe heat treated blade for metal piercing Vise Grip Wrench 10 inches long 3 Hack Saw Blades 10 inch steel Metal Cutting Saw 20 inch blade 2 Slot Screwdrivers 4 inch and 6 inch 2 Phillips Screwdrivers 4 inch and 6 inch TM 5 4210 228 14 amp P 1 H K PORTER INC Hydrau
113. aiguilles d une montre Voir galement page 31 Drivrem K65 Drivremmen ar helt nkapslad och val skyd dad mot damm och smuts s val som mot averkan vid kapning TM 5 4210 228 14 amp P 1 Vid strackning av drivremmen lossas mutt rarna som haller kaparmen med verktyg 38 1306 Lossa ratten 17 som laser sprangskyddet och remskyddet Drag av remskyddet framat s remmen fr lagd Lossa l smuttern pa spannskruven och justera ut skruven med nyckel 381158 Drivremmen skall vara sa hart spand att den knappt kan tryckas ned mot botten kaparmen med normal tumkraft Det skall kravas en kraft av 4 kp att trycka ned remmen 5 mm Drag t l smuttern och darefter de muttrarna som h ller kaparmen Skjut pa remskyddet och drag t ratten Vee belt K65 The belt s completely enclosed and well protected from dust and dirt as well as from mechanical damage during cutting work To stretch the vee belt loosen the nuts re taining the cutter arm Use tool 381306 Loosen the knob 17 securing the safety casing and the belt protector Pull off the belt protector forward to expose the belt Loosen the locknut on the tensioning screw and Antriebsriemen K65 Der Antriebsriemen ist vollig eingekapselt und wird gut gegen Staub und Schmutz so wie gegen mechanische Beschadigung be Schneid und Trennarbeiten geschutzt Zum Spannen des Antriebsriemens mit dem Werkzeug 381306 die Muttern losen mit denen der Trennarm befestigt
114. aintenance and adjustments necessary to keep the fire suppressing securing systems and emergency vehicle equipment in ready condition Higher maintenance is responsible for the major maintenance service and repair as necessary to bring the vehicle back into the operating condition The information contained in this manual is limited to the fire suppressing securing system serial numbers 001 thru 005 and emergency equipment mounted on the International Truck Model 1854 4x4 This manual contains the necessary information needed to prepare for use operate recharge inspect maintain service and repair the fire suppressing securing system The contractor warrants for a period of one year all supplies furnished under Contract DAAKO1 78 C 1667 to be free from defects of design material and workmanship and conforms with specifications and all other requirements of this contract Applicable publications include Federal Sign and Signal Corporation Siracom II Siren Control System Model PA2100 with FN 900 Microphone and TS 100 Speaker designed to be installed in the Model 24 Light Bar Assembly Publications include Dome Assembly Installation Instructions No 256A358 FN 900 Adaptor for PA override operation Installation Instructions No 256A99B Model PA 2100 Installation and Service Instructions No 255A150G Service and Parts Index No 256A359 Unity Manufacturing Company Model AG 6 inch rear decklight No 225 spotlight right and left Publi
115. aker short circuited voice coil Make certain that the speaker is not defective prior to installing the repaired Interceptor 11 The factory can and will service your equipment or assist you with technical problems should any arise that cannot be handled satisfactorily and promptly locally Communications and shipments should be addressed to Service Dept Signal Division Federal Sign and Signal Corporation 136th and Western Avenue Blue Island Illinois 60406 If any unit is returned for adjustment or repair it can be accepted only if we are notified by letter or phone in advance of its arrival Such notice should clearly indicate the service requested and give all pertinent information regarding nature of malfunction and if possible its cause 7 2 MAINTENANCE A Removal from Mounting Bracket When removing the Interceptor from the counting bracket loosen the two hexagon head screws on the underside of the unit ear the front edge see It is not necessary to remove the mounting bracket from location or the siren case from the racket Disconnect all plug in connectors Slide the entire chassis and control panel at of the case B Removal of Circuit Board The board is attached to the chassis by four Phillips head screws Removing these crews permits the board to be pivoted out of the chassis without breaking any of the electrical connections and allowing ample access to all components C Symmetry Adj
116. al is usually provided on the horn relay If a screw terminal is not provided connect the wire to the lead that connects to the horn relay 3 Connect the other terminal of the toggle switch to the white lead P3 pin 4 if the vehicle has a negative ground system with a grounded horn ring see When the vehicle has a positive ground system with a grounded horn ring or a negative ground system with an ungrounded horn ring connect this terminal of the toggle switch to the green lead P3 pin 3 see figure 7 4 Connect the center terminal of the toggle switch to the horn ring switch as shown ir figure 6 or 7 5 Place the hexagon nut on the threaded portion of the toggle switch Insert the threaded portion of the toggle switch through the hole in the dash and secure with the knurled nut 3 5 RADIO INTERCONNECTING CABLE The radio interconnecting cable has a Six prong connector that plugs into P2 at the rear of the electronic TM 5 4210 228 14 amp P 1 siren After installation of the cable the electronic siren has the provision to broadcast two way radio messages over the loudspeaker Also the two way radio microphone can be used to take advantage of the electronic siren s public address feature Refer to the instruction sheet furnished with the radio interconnecting cable for proper connection 3 6 MICROPHONE CONNECTION The electronic siren s public address feature can be utilized after the connection of microphone Th
117. am Motor und danach Trennarm montieren so die Schraube fur die Stre be in das untere Loch des Kurbelgehauses pa t Die Schrauben A und B untereinander austauschen Riemen auf das vordere R emenrad auflegen und excenter spannen Trennarm fest anz ehen und die Gehause montieren Le bras d coupeur est demont de la m me facon que lors de l change de la courroie d entrainement voir page 16 Enlever gale ment le volant et la vis qui maintiennent l tat Tourner le protecteur 180 Monter la courroie d entrainement sur le moteur et ensuite le bras d coupeur d une facon telle que la vis d eta s adapte au trou nfe rieur du carter de manivelle Interchanger les vis a et b Placer la courroie sur la roue courroie avant et tendre le tendeur Serrer le bras d coupeur et monter les couvercles Underhalisschema Detta underhallsschema ar en sammanstallning over de ol ka atgarder som namns boken och som ar nodvand ga for skotsel av kapmask nen De angivna tidsintervallerna bor till lampas om kapmask nen anvands m nst 4 timmar om dagen Anvands kapmask nen kortare per dag kan de kortaste ntervallerna forlangas utan olagenhet Enhet pa sagen Sprangskydd Reglage Startapparat Luftfilter Forfilter Huvudfilter Spilifilter Forgasare Tandst ft Motor Drivrem Bransletank Skruvar och muttrar Maintenance scheme Atgard Kontroll av funktion Kontroll av funktion Rengoring och smorjning
118. amp Chain Assembly 7095 Pin Ring 7066 Chain Ring Pin 507 Rivet 6579 Label 32759 Cartridge Nitrogen Shipping Assembly 7013 Cartridge Nitrogen 24380 Cap Safety Shipping 1188 Seal Visual Inspection 15999 001 N OO P OD Not included with Cartridge Guard Assembly included with Actuating Device Assembly or Separately TM 5 4210 228 14 amp P 1 ANSUL QUICK OPENING NITROGEN CYLINDER VALVE WITH PNEUMATIC VALVE ACTUATOR 4 Valve Assembly Nut Handwheel Handwheel Bezel and Crystal Assembly Washer Disc Plug Plug Safety Shipping Not Shown Inspection Seal Lead and Wire Not Shown 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 New washer Part No 4297 is required when replacing disc Part No 7486 Available on request specify cylinder model 8 20 TM 5 4210 228 14 amp P 1 ANSUL PNEUMATIC VALVE ACTUATOR Q 0 Valve Actuator Assembly Crescent Ring Actuator Arm Roll Pin Actuator Body Anchor Stud Cap Nut Bushing Quad Ring Bushing Retaining Ring Piston Rod Piston O Ring End Plug Retaining Ring 8 21 TM 5 4210 228 14 amp P 1 ANSUL TWIN TURRET ASSEMBLY TM 5 4210 228 14 amp P 1 ANSUL TWIN TURRET ASSEMBLY DESCRIPTION PART NO Twin Turret Assembly S 52797 Dry Chemical Barrel 14035 Adapter 19559 AFFF Barrel 19444 Adapter 19558 0 Ring 2 19557 Turret Assembly w o Barrel 2 19621 Gasket 2 10 02975 Nut 2 161 10009 Elevation Rod 2 19664 Clevis H
119. ampere fuse The Siren Module produces three distinct siren sounds WAIL YELP and HI LO In addition it also has provisions for public address PA and radio rebroadcast LED indicator illuminates when the SELECTOR is set to RADIO radio rebroadcast A manual SIREN pushbutton switch is included for control of the Manual Wail signal The siren can also be operated by an auxiliary switch such as the vehicle horn switch or a foot switch The unit can still be operated manually by depressing the SIREN button if an auxiliary switch is installed The II Instant Yelp feature provides push on push off operation when the auxiliary switch is operated while the MASTER switch is in position 3 and the SELECTOR switch is in the WAIL YELP or HI LO positions The PA 2100 can be used with a Model MNCT microphone or in common with the microphone included with the two way radio installed in the vehicle The Model MNCT microphone is a transistorized noise canceling microphone that has the characteristics necessary to drive the audio amplifier in the PA 2100 A Model FN900 Adapter Module is required when the MNCT Microphone is used with the PA 2100 In common microphone operation an optional adapter module connects the siren directly to the two way radio The common microphone is electrically connected to the two way radio in all SELECTOR switch positions except PA When the SELECTOR switch is set to PA the microphone is connected t
120. and main filter at the specified intervals can result in engine break down Bei Trenn und Schneidarbeiten in Stahl mu das Hauptfilter nach ca 60 Betriebsstunden und in Beton nach ca 40 Betriebsstunden ausgewechselt werden Be besonders schwierigen Arbeitsverhaltnissen mussen die Austauschintervalle kurzer sein Zur Beachtung Fehlerhafte Wartung oder Nichtbeachtung der vorgeschriebenen Austauschintervalle f r Vorfilter und Haupt filter konnen zu ernsthaften Motorschaden f hren Lors de d coupage de m tal le filtre princi pal doit tre remplac apr s environ 60 heures de marche et lors de d coupage de b ton apr s environ 40 heures de marche Lors de conditions d emploi ment difficiles de la d coupeuse les inter valles de remplacement doivent tre plus courts Remarque Un mauvais entretien ou un oubli de remplacer le pr filtre et le filtre principal conform ment aux intervalles mentionn s peut donner lieu une destruc tion du moteur TM 5 4210 228 14 amp P 1 skruven t skruvas tn ca a varv efter be roring med gasarmen Eiter varmkorning kan forgasaren finjusteras L gvarvsskruven L stalls in s tt motorn ej stannar tom gang Hogvarvsskruven H skruvas in sa att motorn accelererar tomg ng vid hastigt gasp drag Darefter oppnas skruven Ya vary Forgasaren ar forsedd med en auto mat sk varvtalsbegransare som forhindrar for hog periferihastighet p kapskivan V
121. anger Assembly 2 10 04555 Cap Screw 4 1 52 05018 Roll Pin 2 4108 Cap Screw 5 16 2 Nut 5 16 2 Adapter Yoke 2 Horizontal Tie Bar Shoulder Screw 2 Nut 1 4 2 Vertical Tie Rod Nut 1 2 S S 2 Elevation Rod Connector 2 10 04543 Lower Handle 2 10 04542 Cap Screw 2 1 52 05041 Stop Nut 2 1 61 05005 Connector Pin 2 10 04545 E Ring 4 1 85 03140 Handle Latch Assembly 2 10 04547 Union Swivel Adapter 2 Hose Coupling 2 Male NPTF 2 Hose 1 13 16 ID Specify Length 2 Lockwasher 1 4 2 Flatwasher 1 2 4 Cotter Pin 1 8 x 1 1 4 4 Parts supplied by FSCM 52659 8 23 TM 5 4210 228 14 amp P 1 ANSUL HAND VALVE AND PNEUMATIC ACTUATOR d B di N A A TM 5 4210 228 14 amp P 1 ANSUL HAND VALVE AND PNEUMATIC ACTUATOR la DESCRIPTION QUANTITY PART NO Hand Valve and Pneumatic Actuator Assembly Valve Hand Lever Frame Hand Valve Bolt Hex Hd 1 4 20NC x 3 4 Lockwasher 1 4 Nut Hex 1 4 20NC Screw No 10 24x 1 Lockwasher No 10 Nut Hex No 1024 Connector 1 4 x 1 4 Nameplate Hand Valve Tube Black Nylon 1 4 O D Lg as required Tie Cable Sta Strap Elbow Male 1 4 O D Tube x 1 4 NPT Ex Lg Actuator Ball Valve Regulator Pressure Elbow 1 4 NPTx 1 4 0 D Tube Nipple Close Elbow 1 4 Coupling Quick 1 4 Hose High Pressure 1 4 Lg as required Grommet Grommet Stud Lockwasher 1 2 Nut Hex 1
122. anks gespannt werden Danach d e Spannung tagl ch kon trollieren Le tendeur de courroie est constitu par un puissant ressort comprim l aide d un ex L excentrique fig doit tre tourn dans le sens des aiguilles d une montre ce moment le courroie est suffi samment tendu par la force du ressort Une nouvelle courroie doit tre tendue apr s 1 2 remplissages de carburant d apr s chaque jour 17 Spr ngskydd Sprangskyddet skall stallas in s att bakre delen ligger nara arbetsstycket Slippartiklar och gnistor samlas da upp av skyddet och avleds fran foraren Med hjalp av ratten nr 17 sidan 4 lossas skyddet och kan stallas in i onskat lage Guard The guard should be adjusted so that its rear section s close to the workpiece Particles dust or sparks from cutting are then collected by the guard and directed away from the operator By using the knob no 17 page 4 the guard can be loosened and adjusted to the desired position Splitterschutz Der Schutz mu so eingestellt werden da das untere Teil des Schutzes in nachster Nahe des Werkstuckes liegt und somit den Funkenstrahl auffangt um ihn vom Bediener abzuleiten Durch Drehen des Knopfes Nr 17 Seite 4 wird der Schutz gelost und kann in die gewunschte Lage eingestellt werden Protecteur Le protecteur doit tre plac de sorte que sa partie arri re se trouve pr s de la machine Les particules de decoupage et les tin celles
123. app Chokeknapp Tomg ngssparr Gasreglage Startgassparr Starthandtag Startapparat L smutter for luftfilter Luftfilter Tandst ft Cylinder Drivrem Kaparm Ratt for sprangskydd Remspannare Drivhjul koppling Bransletank Pos Description Cutter disc Guard Knob for guard Stop control Choke Idling catch Throttle control Starter throttle control Starting handle Starter unit Lock nut for air fifter Air filter Spark plug Cylinder Vee belt Cutting arm Knob for guard Belt tens oner Drive wheel clutch Fuel tank Pos Bezeichnung 1 Trennscherbe 2 Splitterschutz 3 Splitterschutzknopf 4 Abstellknopf 5 Choke 6 Leerlaufsperre 7 Gashebel 8 Anwerfgassperre 9 Anwerfgriff 10 Anwerfvorrichtung 11 Sicherungsmutter fur Luftfilter 12 Luftfilter 13 Zundkerze 14 Zylinder 15 Antriebsriemen 16 Trennarm 17 Splitterschutzknopf 18 Riemenspannung 19 Kettenrad Kupplung 20 Kraftstofftank Pos D signation 1 Disque d coupeur 2 Protecteur 3 Volant du protecteur 4 Bouton d arr t 5 Bouton de starter 6 Blocage de ralenti 7 Commande d acc l ration 8 Blocage de d marrage 9 Poign e de d marrage 10 Dispositif de mise en route 11 Ecrou pour filtre air 12 Filtre alr 13 Bougie 14 Cyl ndre 15 Courroie d entrainement 16 Bras de d coupage 17 Volant du protecteur 18 Tendeur de courro e 19 Accouplement 20 R servoir de carburant TM 5 4210 228 14 amp P 1 Anvand aldrig m
124. are must be taken to avoid air bubbles when placing sample on the refractometer prism 3 To hold the instrument for reading place middle finger on nameplate and press the plastic cover gently but firmly to spread a minimal volume of sample In a thin even layer over the prism Expose it to an illuminating Source such as a fluorescent or incandescent lamp or full sunlight NOTE To obtain the optimum contrast between light and dark boundary the instrument may have to be properly tilted with respect to the lamp 4 Bring the scale seen in the eyepiece into best focus by rotation of the eyepiece NOTE This setting need not be changed as long as the same individual continues to use the Instrument Make the reading on the appropriate scale at the point where the dividing line between bright and dark fields crosses the scale The average value obtained from three tests must be within 0 15 of the initial refractive index This procedure is essentially Identical to that given In Instructions for Use and Care of the AO TS Meter and Concentrimeter by the American Optical Corporation Scientific Instrument Division Buffalo New York 14215 The TS meter Is available from scientific supply companies such as Rascher Betzold or Curtin Scientific at a cost of about 500 The TS meter is compensated to give correct readings directly on aqueous solutions at all temperatures ranging from 60 F to 100 F TM 5 4210 228 14 amp P 1 TEST PROCEDURES
125. are not included as part of the electronic siren FEDERAL speakers are weatherproof and may be installed in any convenient location on the roof fender behind the grille etc Any special mounting instructions applicable to the model of speaker you have selected will be found in the speaker carton The 12 inch two conductor zip cord P3 pins 5 and 6 should be connected to the speaker leads Either wire may be connected to either speaker lead since polarity is not a factor when using a single speaker It is recommended that the wire splices be soldered and insulated with tape If soldering equipment is not available use the two nuts furnished with the speaker TM 5 4210 228 14 amp P 1 When two speakers are used it is necessary to connect the speakers in parallel and in phase for optimum performance This can be accomplished by connecting the two speaker leads marked 1 to the same power cable lead and the two speaker leads marked 1121 to the other power cable lead sed figure 5 B Connection to Power Source The electronic siren will operate in vehicles having either a negative or positive grounded system Take care to insure battery charging voltage does not exceed 14 6 VDC at any time Operating power can be obtained by making connections directly at the battery terminal or to the hot side of the ignition switch Determine the type of vehicle ground system and perform the applicable procedure described below When t
126. art No 31274 1978 The Ansul Company Litho in U S A TM 5 4210 228 14 amp P 1 FIELD INSPECTION RECORD Ansul Form F7880 TM 5 4210 228 14 amp P 1 el THE ANSUL COMPANY MARINETTE WISCONSIN 54143 ANSUL AFFF FIELD INSPECTION RECORD Ansul AFFF Lot No s D 3 or O 6 Concentrate Date Received Location O Storage O Installation Amount of Agent Is concentrate to be premixed either now or later O Yes D No INITIAL INSPECTION CONCENTRATE ONLY DATE QUALITY OF SAMPLE REFRACTIVE INDEX INITIAL INSPECTION PREMIX SOLUTION ONLY AMOUNT OF AMOUNT OF REFRACTIVE QUALITY OF WATER WATER CONCENTRATE INDEX PERIODIC INSPECTION 96 CONCENTRATION FROM GRAPH PREMIX ONLY FILM FORMATION AND EXPANSION SEALABILITY REFRACTIVE INDEX INSPECTION PERFORMED BY QUALITY DATE OF SAMPLE Refractive index versus concentrate curve for premix solution to be constructed on reverse Inspect premix solutions annually Inspect concentrate every 5 years Refer to the manual for proper procedure Form No F 7880 1978 The Ansul Company Litho in U S A TM 5 4210 228 14 amp P 1 REFRACTIVE INDEX 596 HERE CONCENTRATION TM 5 4210 228 14 amp P 1 TEMPERATURE C
127. as described in this section Pflege der Trennscheiben Vorsicht bei der Hantierung und Verwahrung von Trennscheiben damit sie nicht beschadigt werden Nach dem Auspacken sofort die Trennscheiben ge nau auf Schaden untersuchen die wahrend der des Transportes oder aus anderen Grunden enstanden sein konnen Die Trennscheiben sollen legend auf ebene Flache in ausreichendem Abstand von starker Warme und Feuchtigkeit verwahrt werden Sie dur fen wahrend der Lagerung nicht hoher Luftfeuch tigkeit Wasser und anderen Flussigkeiten oder Temperaturen under 0 C ausgesetzt werden Beim Transport von Trennsagen soll die Trenn scheibe abmontiert sein und gema den hier gege benen Anweisungen verwahrt werden um Schaden zu vermeiden Entretien des disques d coupeurs faut observer des precautions lors de la manu tention et de la garde des disques d coupeurs de sorte qu ils ne soient pas endommages Immediatement apr s le deballage des disques decoupeurs faut les examiner afin de s assurer ils n ont pas et endommages en cours de ma nutention transport etc Les disques decoupeurs doivent tre conserves horizontalement sur une surface plane et bonne distance de toute source de chaleur elev e ou d umidite Les disques ne doivent pas tre soumis action d une humidite d air trop elevee celle leau ou autres liquides ou bien encore des temperatures situees au dessous Zero Lors de transport de ia
128. asket s or 0 ring s if cut checked deformed brittle or worn and reassemble oiling inlet body bear ing and greasing pinion gear See Reel Immovable above if leakage is dis covered at a fitting other than the hose to reel connection COMPONENT Pneumatic Actuation System Turret DISORDER Corroded jammed or broken puncture lever Dull bent or damaged puncture pin Corroded nicked cross threaded or worn cartridge receiver threads Obstructed cartridge receiver pressure vent hole Wrong cartridge Gas cartridge corroded dented or abraded or gas cartridge cross threaded or worn Scored cut or corroded gas cartridge seal disc or illegible identification or weight markings Wrong cartridge seal used in previous recharge to supplier Corroded jammed cracked broken or leaking nitrogen cylinder valve actuator Obstructed pneumatic valve actuator piston downstroke pressure relief vent TM 5 4210 228 14 amp P 1 SERVICE AND REPAIR CORRECTIVE ACTION Clean repair to free movement or replace Replace pin making certain safety retaining ring is secure in groove near tip Remove receiver destroy threads discard and replace Clear vent with stiff unbreakable probe of lesser diameter than vent hole Replace cartridge with type specified by Ansul only refer to applicable parts list Depressurize disconnect high pressure line to cylinder s and push remote actuator lever to saf
129. askinen nar Du ar trott Anvand skor som ger s kert grepp tatt tsittande klader skyddsglasogon hor sel och huvudskydd och skydds handskar Var allt d forsiktig vid p fyllning bran sie Forflytta kapmaskinen minst tre me ter fran pafyllningsstallet nnan den star tas Kontrollera alltid att ingen befinner sig I narheten d maskinen startas eller un der kapning Askadare och djur m ste h llas utanfor arbetsomr det Borja aldrig innan arbetsomr det ar fritt och fotfastet sakert H ll allt d maskinen i ett fast grepp med b da handerna nar motorn r igang Hall ett fast grepp med tummar och fingrar som sluter sig kring handtagen H ll Dig avst nd fr n kapskivan nar motorn ar ig ng Sprangskyddet skall alltid vara H ll inte skivan snett sp ret kila heller inte in eller klam fast sk van sp ret 10 Kontrollera att skivan inte ar kontakt med n gonting nnan motorn startas 11 15 16 17 18 TM 5 4210 228 14 amp P 1 S kerhets tg rder for kapmaskinsforare Nar man bar maskinen skall motorn all tid vara avstangd och ljuddamparen rik tad bort fr n ens kropp Arbeta aldrig med en kapmaskin som ar skadad eller fel nstalid eller med en kap maskin dar n gon del saknas eller dar monteringen inte har gjorts ett be tryggande satt Kontrollera att skivan siu tar rotera nar gasreglaget frigores St ng allt d av motorn innan maskinen s tts ner
130. ast medurs The disc is located between the flange hub a and the flange washer b Turn the flange washer round so that it fits into the flange hub The cutter disc should be tightened by using the f xed wrench 381317 that s n cluded in the tool kit The spindle is secured by means of pin 202934 which ts pushed in as far as possible The disc is tightened clockwise Die Trennscheibe wird zwischen der Flan schnabe a und der Flanschscheibe b an gebracht Die Flanschscheibe ist so zu dre hen da sie in die Flanschnabe pa t Die Scheibe soll mit dem festen Schlussel 381317 der zum Werkzeugsatz gehort ange zogen werden Die Welle wird mit dem Stift 202934 verriegelt der so weit wie moglich eingeschoben werden Die Scheibe wird Im Uhrzeigersinn fest angezogen Le disque est plac entre le moyeu de bride a et l appui de bride b L appui de bride est tourn de sorte qu il s adapte dans le moyeu de bride Le disque d coupeur est serr l aide de la clef tube 381317 qui fait partie du Jeu d outils L axe est bloqu l aide de la gou pille 202934 qui est enfonc e aussi loin que possible Le disque est serr dans le sens des aiguilles d une montre 13 Skivan placeras mellan flansnavet a och flansbrickan b Flansbrickan vrids runt s att den passar in I flansnavet Kapskivan dra ges fast med hylsnyckel 381317 som ing r verktygssatsen H ll emot axeln med tand stiftsnyckeln Skivan drages fast medurs
131. ate successfully passes these two tests it is acceptable Should the sample fail either of these two ests Ansul then recommends that the following tests be performed to ensure the sample is acceptable Pages 6 1 Measurement of Film Formation and Sealability 2 Measurement of Expansion Quality of Sample Continued 5 Let the sample sit for about five minutes then examine for stratification sediment or sludge If more than 1 96 by volume of sediment or sludge is found it may be necessary to replace the concentrate 6 If the sample evidences unacceptable levels of sludge or sediment in Step 5 return to the concentrate container and repeat Steps 2 through 5 to verify your findings Continue with the Test Procedures which follow Measurement of Refractive Index This test should be performed three times with the result averaged to obtain the figure for the Field Inspection Record entry 1 Hold your TS Meter in a horizontal position swing the cover plate over the body of the instrument to expose both the prism and the cover plate surface clean if required and place a small concentrate sample on the measuring prism NOTE Use a plastic pipette to minimize the possibility of scratching the prism surface by the contact with the pipette tip 2 Swing close the cover plate over the measuring prism without delay to assure minimum evaporation CAUTION Take care to avoid lifting the cover plate before the reading is made C
132. av rorliga dela Skakas rent Rengores bytes Rengores bytes Rengoring justering Kontroll och justering av elektrodavstand Byte Rengoring av kylflansar Ny rem strackes efter Darefter kontrollera spann ngen Byte av branslefilter Kontroll av atdragn ng TM 5 4210 228 14 amp P 1 Utfores alltid allt d var e manad vid varje tankning se sid 25 och 27 av aukt verkstad vid behov vid behov varannan m nad varannan vecka 1 2 tankars korning varje dag minst en gang ar varje vecka The following is a summary of various measures mentioned in the book and which is essential for the correct servicing of the cutting machine The time intervals mentioned should be applied if the cutting machine is used for at least 4 hours every day If the machine is used for a shorter time each day the shortest intervals can be extended without any ill effects Unit on cutter Operation Frequency Guard Controls Starter unit Air filter Pre filter Main filter Spill filter Carburetor Spark plug Engine Vee belt Fuel tank Screws bolts and nuts Check function Check function Clean and lubricate moving parts Shake clean Clean replace Clean replace Check Check and adjust electrode gap Replace Clean cooling vanes New belt to be tensioned after thereafter check belt tension Replace filter cartridge Check tightening 32 always always every month at every tanking operation see page
133. b BLUE Hose Clean Out Valve CLOSED TM 5 4210 228 14 amp P 1 INSPECTION INSTRUCTIONS 5 4210 228 14 amp 1 INSPECTION INSTRUCTIONS c BLACK AFFF Valve OPEN 16 Replace any broken or missing visual inspection seal s Ansul Part No 15999 17 Swing turrets horizontally and vertically to check for free movement 18 Make certain both turret valve operating controls are in the closed position 5 6 19 Make certain hose reel is unlocked 20 Pull ring pin on nozzle assembly holder and pull out several feet of hose to check for free movement 21 Examine nozzle openings for obstruction 22 Squeeze nozzle triggers to check for free movement TM 5 4210 228 14 amp P 1 INSPECTION INSTRUCTIONS TM 5 4210 228 14 amp 1 INSPECTION INSTRUCTIONS 23 Rewind hose on reel NOTE Do not lock hose reel 24 Secure nozzle assembly on holder and insert ring pin NOTE Make certain nozzle triggers are forward in the CLOSED position 25 Make certain all rescue equipment is properly secured 26 Check that all doors are tightly latched TM 5 4210 228 14 amp P 1 INSPECTION INSTRUCTIONS 27 Record date of inspection check if required 5 9 5 10 Blank To provide maximum assurance that your Ansul fire suppressing securing system will operate effectively and safely fire suppressing securing systems must be maintained at six month intervals or when specifically indicated by an i
134. bility Blocking diode to prevent damage to the unit if the power leads are reversed e Silicon transistors for maximum reliability e Constructed to facilitate servicing TM 5 4210 228 14 amp P 1 SECTION Il SPECIFICATIONS Input Voltage ee 10 VDC to 14 6 VDC 6 VDC unit optional Elle Ve 500 MA maximum MANUAL position Operating u RR A 6 amperes WAIL position 1 speaker 10 amperes WAIL position 2 speakers Operating Temperature 30 to 65 Frequency Hange nennen 500 Hz to 1400 Hz Cycle Rate AA Wail 10 cycles minute Yelp 240 cycles minute Hi Lo 45 cycles minute Voltage Output 13 6 VDC Input 40 Vpp 11 ohm resistive load 38 Vpp 5 5 ohm resistive load Audio Distotton Less than 1096 from 300 Hz to 3000 Hz at output power levels of 1 10 watt to 25 watts Auxiliary switch leakage resistance 10K ohms minimum 2 3 4 5 W 7 1 D inches NS 4 pounds 2 ounces Shipping Weight 6 pounds NOTE The following parameters were obtained with the radio input potentiometer R30 and GAIN control set at maximum The voltages shown are needed to obtain the maximum sine wave output of 17 volts RMS Radio Input nennen Impedance 1800 ohms Voltage 0 55V RMS Carbon Microphone Input Impedance 3500 ohms Voltage 0 15V RMS Magnetic Microphone Impedan
135. bjet d couper 34 TM 5 4210 228 14 amp P 1 Vid kapn ng sten betong eller I knande material bor skivan foras fram och tillbaka sp ret s att man far god varmeavledning och lag temperatur slippunkten Finns det mojlighet att kyla skivan med vatten uppn s mycket god skivekonomi When cutting stone concrete and similar material the disc should be moved forwards and backwards in the cut to obtain good conduction of heat away from the disc and a low temperature at the cutting point If there is a possibility to cool the cutter disc with water this results in very good cutter disc economy Beim Schneiden von Stein Beton oa soll die Scheibe im Schlitz hin und her gefuhrt werden so da man ene gute Warmeab leitung und niedrige Temperatur am Schieif punkt erhalt Wenn Moglichkeit besteht die Scheibe durch Wasser abzukuhlen wird eine sehr gute Scheibenwirtschaftlichkeit er reicht Lors de d coupage de pierre beton et ma t riaux similaires on obtient la plus gran de rapidit de coupe si l on p n tre dans la mati re d couper par un mouvement avan cant et reculant de sorte obtenir une bonne dissipation de la chaleur du disque et une basse temp rature au point de d coupage S l on a la possibilit de refroidir le disque avec de l eau cela permet d obtenir une am lioration de la rentabilit du disque TM 5 4210 228 14 amp P 1 Verktyg Verktyg s KIZUD Werkzeuge Werkzeuge Outils Ou
136. by the GAIN control This is the only position in which the microphone is disconnected from the two way radio s transmitter if common microphone is used for both the electronic siren and two way radio C MANUAL In this position it is possible to operate the siren by depressing the front panel SIREN button The siren TM 5 4210 228 14 amp P 1 can also be activated by means of an auxiliary switch such as a foot switch or horn ring button Operation will be similar to that of a conventional electro mechanical siren D WAIL In this position the siren will produce a continuous wailing sound up or down in frequency E YELP In this position a continuous rapid warbled tone is generated F HI LO In this position a two tone sound will be heard This distinctive tone may be reserved for any special indication or situation SECTION V OPERATION 5 1 TURNING THE UNIT OR OFF To turn the unit on rotate the GAIN control clockwise until a click is heard The pilot lamp will illuminate To turn the unit off rotate the GAIN control fully counterclockwise 5 2 RADIO OR PA OPERATION Set the SELECTOR switch to RADIO or PA Adjust the GAIN control to a position just below the point at which feedback occurs When maximum volume in the P A position is required hold the microphone close to your lips and speak in a loud voice he radial lines around the GAIN control m be used for pre setting the level
137. cations DEPARTMENT NOTES 21 TM 5 4210 228 14 amp P 1 MAINTENANCE AND CARE OF THE P F 10 TON HYDRAULIC REMOTE CONTROL JACK OIL INSPECTION 1 Open Control Lever A and fully re tract Ram B Fig 1 2 Stand Pump on tank end See Fig 1 remove Filler Screw C If oil flows out of the filler hole C no additional oil is needed CAUTION DO NOT FILL UNIT WHEN PUMP IS IN HORIZON TAL POSITION FILLING INSTRUCTIONS 1 Fully retract ram B 2 Stand pump on tank end Fig 2 and remove filler screw C Fill pump with P F Hydraulic Fluid using oil can until oil flows out of filler hole Replace filler screw BLEEDING INSTRUCTIONS J Place pump in vise at slight angle Fig 3 so that jaws of vise grip tank NOT PUMP HOUSING Exert only enough squeeze to hold pump in position 2 With ram B in lowest position Fig 4 CLOSE Control Lever and fully ex tend Ram Hold Ram in this position for 1 minutes Turn control level A counterclockwise or away from hose end Fig 5 and with Ram Piston resting on floor exert strong steady pressure on Ram Cyl inder so that it is quickly retracted Be sure that hose is held out straight THIS IS VERY IMPORTANT as it allows oil pressure to force any air trapped in Ram or hose back through the pumping system thus eliminating air pockets Remove pump from vise and stand pump on tank end Fig 1 Remove filler screw C allowing ex
138. cations include Parts Sheet No 105 6 Porter Incorporated Model PK4 Hydraulic Rescue Kit 10 ton capacity Publications include Instruction Book No 10119 Instruction Envelope No ISM 200 Instruction Sheet No 1PF10 and Service Station Listing No 10120 Hurst Performance Incorporated Model 3620025 Rescue Tool Publications include Instruction Manual No 159 0082 1 1 TM 5 4210 228 14 amp P 1 INTRODUCTION Sierra Company Model CRK5 Sierra Rescue Crash Tool Kit Publications None contents listed in vendor s publication section International Harvester Company Truck Division Model 1854 Truck 4x4 Publications include Service Manual 3 volumes No CTS 231 1 Parts Catalog No MT 140 Paratech Incorporated Formerly Partner Industries Model K 1200 Rescue Saw Publications included Instruction Book No 701042 Parts List No 711142 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION The Ansul Twin Agent Fire Fighting Truck is designed for combating fire via roof mounted turrets or rear mounted hand lines which can be used together or independently The truck is the basic International Model 1854 4x4 chassis with a service body attached and an Ansul 1350 PKP 200 AFFF fire suppressing securing system mounted on the truck bed The fire fighting truck also includes a roof mounted warning light bar with built in speakers controlled by an indicator switch an electric siren public address and radio amplifier system with foot control switch
139. ce 20K ohms Voltage 0 03V RMS TM 5 4210 228 14 amp P 1 SECTION III INSTALLATION 3 1 UNPACKING After unpacking the Model PA 20A examine it for damage that may have occurred in transit H the equipment has been damaged file a claim immediately with the carrier stating the extent of the damage Carefully check all envelopes shipping labels and tags before removing or destroying them The radio interconnecting cable if ordered is packed in a separate carton The packing carton in which the electronic siren is packed contains A Model PA 20A Electronic Siren B Mounting bracket C Envelope containing mounting hardware D Warranty Card E Power Cable 3 2 MOUNTING BRACKET The electronic siren comes equipped with a swinging bracket which enables it to be mounted in a variety of positions seel figure 2 Positioning the bracket above the unit allows mounting to the underside of the dash THE BRACKET SERVES Positioning the bracket below the unit will permit mounting above the dash or on any horizontal surface The unit should be mounted in a position that is both comfortable and convenient to the operator After determining the mounting position proceed as follows CAUTION The unit must be installed in an adequately ventilated area Never install near heater ducts A Use the mounting bracket as a template and mark two positioning holes B Drill two 1 4 inch mounting holes C Mount the bracket with the 1 4 2
140. cess oil to expel through filler hole If oil will flow out of filler hole unit is properly filled If oil does not flow out repeat No 2 under FILLING INSTRUCTIONS Replace filler screw C securely and turn Control Lever clockwise or toward hose end A Operate Pump with full stroke Ram should extend Ya on first stroke If the Ram will not extend Pump is air bound and it will be neces sary to repeat bleeding instructions For the protection of your P F Ram use only Genuine P F HYDRAULIC FLUID 22 CARE AND PROTECTION OF THE TM 5 4210 228 14 amp P 1 P F HYDRAULIC RESCUE KIT The Hydraulic Rescue Kit has It requires a minimum of care and been carefully engineered and man stands up under a maximum of hard ufactured to give trouble free serv usage Here are a few simple do s ice and to last for years It has been and dont s which will keep it func thoroughly examined and tested be toning and in good condition fore leaving the factory Protect the threads on Ram Cylinder Protector Ring BU 576 is furnished and should always be screwed on Ram unless other attachments are being used Also protect Piston by keeping Ram Cap BU 575 screwed on when not usinq i other attachments Keep Oil Lines clean Use every precaution to guard unit against entrance of dirt or other foreign matter which might cause pump failure DO Use only Hydraulic Fluid Ne
141. d in this manual Storage Conditions Ansul recommends that its Ansul AFFF concentrate and premix solutions be stored at temperatures between 350 F 1 70 C and 1200 F 48 90 C Tests have been conducted with the concentrate and premix solutions stored at 1500 F 65 50 C with no adverse effect However the Underwriters Laboratories Standard No 162 requires that the maximum storage temperature be listed at 1200 F 48 90 C Storage of the concentrate below 350 F 1 70 C could result in freezing of the agent Should the agent freeze TM 5 4210 228 14 amp P 1 it should be thawed at or near room temperature and then agitated or stirred to ensure that the concentrate Is a homogeneous solution Should you suspect the agent was frozen in the past agitation will again ensure a homogeneous solution Ansul AFFF Concentrate Test Procedures Found on Pages 2 6 The concentrate as received from Ansul may be stored in the original container or in a concentrate tank at temperatures of 350 F 1 70 C or 120 F 48 90 C Ansul recommends that the Ansul AFFF concentrate be tested once every five years or more frequently if adverse storage conditions exist The testing as described in this manual consists of verifying that the concentrate is a clear colorless liquid Ansul AFFF 6 or a clear pale yellow liquid AnSul AFFF 396 and that It has a refractive index of 1 3560 to 1 3620 for 6 concentrate or 1 3590 to 1 3650 for the 3
142. dale Jack Carter amp Son 333 Norton Ave Orlando Central Hydraulic Service 3423 LaSalle St Tampa Dade Equipment Service 960 W 22nd Hialeah Hydraulic Services 200 East Main St Pensacola Auto Body Supply Inc 616 N 13th St Tampa GEORGIA Turner amp Cole 353 W Peachtree St N E Atlanta R amp R Jack Repair 1548 Tenth Ave Columbus amp R Hydraulic Service Inc 511 Roosevelt Ave Albany HAWAII Air Hydraulic Service 842 llaniwai St Honolulu ILLINOIS Sarvall Engineering Co 3937 N Kedzie Ave Chicago INDIANA Servall Engineering 744 Sibley St Hammond A B C Specialty 1075 Kenwood Ave Ft Wayne Arrow Supply Company Inc 924 N Illinois St Indianapolis Scotty s Hyd Jack Service 1204 N Center Plymouth IOWA Turner s Hyd Service 3011 6th Ave DesMoines KANSAS Wichita Hydraulic Service Co 1311 So McLean Wichita KENTUCKY Queen Hydraulic 1226 Rowan St Louisville LOUISIANA Beerman Precision Works 2021 Thalia St New Orleans MAINE Winne s Jack Service Lubec MARYLAND Holdridge Engineering Company 2406 10 Alsquith St Baltimore MASSACHUSETTS Alted Hydraulic Service 96 Hampshire Street Cambridge New England Hydraulic Service Co 12 Hurley St Cambridge Block Hydraulic 2570 Main St Springfield MICHIGAN Hydraulic Service 21251 Ryan Rd Warren Hydraulic Equipment Co 1401 Alpine Ave N W Grand Rapids MINNESOTA t Hyd
143. decoupeuse le disque de coupeur doit tre enleve et conserve selon les indi cations fournies afin qu il ne soit pas endommage 12 TM 5 4210 228 14 amp P 1 Kapskiva Partner kapskivan ar specialtillverkad och godk nd for frihandskapning Pappetiket terna vardera sidan av kapskivan ar till for att fordela trycket fr n flansbrickan och for hindra att skivan slirar Cutter disc PARTNER cutter disc is specially manu factured for free hand cutting The card board labels on each side of the disc are intended for use as a spacer to distribute the pressure from the flange washer Trennscheibe Die PARTNER Trennscheibe ist speziell zum Freihandsagen angefertigt und zugelassen Die zwei Pappscheiben auf Jeder Seite der Trennscheibe sind angebracht um den Druck von der Flanschscheibe zu verteilen und zu verhindern da die Scheibe gleitet Disque d coupeur Le disque d coupeur Partner est sp ciale ment fabriqu et agr pour le d coupage la main Sur chaque c t du disque d cou peur vous trouverez des tiquettes mince en papier pour que la pression des brides se r partisse sur toute la surface d appui TM 5 4210 228 14 amp P 1 Skivan placeras mellan flansnavet a och flansbrickan b Flansbrickan vrids runt s att den passar int flansnavet Kapskivan dra ges fast med hylsnyckel 381317 som ing r i verktygssatsen Axeln l ses med pinne 202934 som skjutes in s l ngt som mojl gt Skivan drages f
144. e moved slightly forward approximately 1 4 inch 6 4 mm to permit installation of the anchor stud WARNING FORWARD MOVEMENT IN EXCESS OF 1 4 INCH 6 4 mm MAY RESULT IN ACTUATION OF THE VALVE d Engage and secure cap nut to anchor stud 16 Remove safety plug from cylinder valve s retain plug s for future use CAUTION Do not place your body or head in front of cylinder valve outlet If valve is accidentally operated velocity of unrestricted escaping gas is forceful enough to cause injury especially about the face and head 5 4210 228 14 amp P 1 ASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS TM 5 4210 228 14 amp P 1 ASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS 17 Connect high pressure hose to cylinder valve s wrench tighten CAUTION Do not strike Pull lever when connecting hose to cylinder valve 18 Make certain visual inspection seal s at cylinder valve s are still intact Replace any broken or missing visual inspection seal s Ansul Part No 15999 19 Make certain dry chemical tank valve handles are ring pinned and sealed in the operating position a RED Tank Valve OPEN b GREEN Vent Valve CLOSED c BLUE Hose Clean Out Valve CLOSED d BLACK Dry Chemical Valve OPEN 20 Replace any broken or missing visual inspection seal s Ansul Part No 15999 21 Make certain AFFF solution tank valve handles are ring pinned and sealed in the operating position a GREEN Vent Valve CLOSED TM 5 4210 228 14 amp P 1 ASSEMBLY
145. e Main Circuit Board move the three screws that hold the board the Siren sed figure 6 2 Disconnect the socket at the rear of the board and lift the board out of the module When replacing the Main Circuit Board align the socket at the rear so that the color dot on the socket is adjacent to the color dot on the circuit board Also be sure that the two plugs on the front of the circuit board mate properly with sockets on the Front Circuit Board 2 To remove the Front Circuit Board remove the Main Circuit Board as described in subparagraph 6 2 C 1 Loosen all control knob set screws and slide the knobs from their control shafts Remove the spanner nuts that hold the SELECTOR and the GAIN control to the front panel of the module Remove the screw that holds the siren button bracket in place see figure 6 and lift out the Front Circuit Board 6 3 CONTROL MODULE To gain access to the interior of the Control Module loosen two hex head screws on the bottom of the PA2100 sed figure 6 7 Slide cover off the unit Most of the circuitry in the Control Module is used to control power to vehicle accessories Therefore if a malfunction occurs in a given circuit the problem TM 5 4210 228 14 amp P 1 is probably external to the Control Module However before troubleshooting he external circuitry always be sure that rear panel of the Control Module is properly wired If malfunctioning device is controlled by the MASTER swi
146. e between bright and dark fields crosses the scale and use the appropriate concentration graph to convert readings to per cent concentration This graph was generated when the initial inspection was performed The procedure is described on Page 11 If the average of the three refractive index readings is not within 1 96 of refractive index anticipated from the appropriate graph and the initial inspection figures of the Field Inspection Record additional tests will be required to verify the acceptability of the Ansul AFFF premix solution Use a soft cloth or soft tissue moisten one end with lukewarm water for wiping the prism clean and dry If the prism surface or cover plate is not well cleaned before the next sample is loaded an erroneous or fuzzy reading may result CAUTION Do not immerse the eyepiece or the black focusing ring in water Never use gritty cleaning compounds to clean the prism and never expose the instrument to temperatures above 1500 F Measurement of Film Formation and Sealability Quality This test should be performed three times with the result averaged to obtain the figure for the Field Inspection Record entry 1 Equipment required to conduct the test includes an automatic blender for use as a test foam maker at 700 50 F an 80 mesh conical screen of corrosion resisting steel 5 inches in height by 43 4 inches in diameter a 1000 ml corrosion resisting graduated measure 41 2 inches in diameter 5 inc
147. e bras de 180 et replacer les pi ces pour ensuite effectuer un vissage identique au vissage pr c dent Il faut observer que la rondelle bride qui maintient le disque d coupeur a un blocage sp cial ne se d gage pas lorsque le disque change de sens de rotation Kaparm K1200 Med kaparmen normallage h lls kapskivan fast av en hogergangad skruv a medan kaparmens fastskruv b ar vanstergangad Det finns mojlighet att vanda kaparmen 180 sa att kapskivan kommer armens motsatta sida Detta underlattar kapning nara vertikala hinder s som vaggar och lik nande Cutting arm K1200 When the cutting arm is in its normal position the cutter disc is held in position by means of a screw with a right hand thread a while the cutter arm attaching screw b has a left hand thread This facilitates cutting close to vertical obstacles such as walls etc Trennarm K1200 Wenn sich der Trennarm in Normallage be findet wird die Trennscheibe durch eine Scheibe a mit Rechtsgewinde festgehalten Die Befestigungsschraube des Trennarms b hat Linksgewinde Man kann den Trenn arm um 180 drehen so da die Trennsche be an der entgegengesetzten Seite des Arms zu liegen kommt Dadurch werden Trenn und Schneidarbeiten an senkrechten Hinder n ssen z B an Wanden erleichtert Bras de d coupage K1200 Lorsque le bras de d coupage est en posi tion normale le disque de d coupage est maintenu en place par une vis
148. e moteur doit tre mis en route car le disque va se mettre tourner en raison de la position de la commande de d marrage Tirer le cordon de d marrage d un ou de plusieurs coups secs jusqu ce que le moteur d marre 21 TM 5 4210 228 14 amp P 1 Startapparat Byte av startlina Lossa flaktk pan Drag ut startlinan en bit och hindra I nsk van fran att snurra tillbaka startlinan urtaget och l t linskivan snurra tillbaka Starter unit Replacing the starter cord Loosen the fan casing Pull out the starter cord a little and prevent the cord drum from rotating back Place the starter cord in the recess and let the cord drum rotate back Anwerfvorrichtung Anwerfseil auswechsein Das Geblasegehause losen Das Anwerfseil ein Stuck herausziehen und darauf achten da die Seilscheibe nicht zuruckspringt Das Anwerfseil in die Aussparung der Seil Scheibe legen und die Seilscheibe zuruck spulen lassen Appareil de d marrage Remplacement du cordon de d marrage Enlever le capot de ventilateur Sortir quel que peu le cordon de d marrage et em p cher le tambour d enroulement de se renbobiner Placer le cordon de d marrage dans l encoche et laisser le tambour d en roulement se renbobiner TM 5 4210 228 14 amp P 1 Lossa l sfjadern och Iyft upp linskivan For den nya startl nan genom h let Iinskivan och vidare genom flaktk pan till starthand taget dar linan stoppas med en knut Loosen the lock sp
149. e two way radio microphone can be used after the connections described in paragraph 3 5 have been made The electronic siren has a receptacle at the bottom of the unit which is used to interconnect a separate microphone The unit will operate with a magnetic controlled magnetic noise canceling carbon or transistorized magnetic microphone A slide switch S3 located just inside the chassis in the front and to the left of the pilot lamp sed figure 10 must be set according to the type of microphone used When a controlled magnetic microphone is used set the switch to the position marked M If a carbon or transistorized microphone is used set the switch to the position marked C HORN OR HORN RELAY STEERING COLUMN HORN RING SWITCH Figure 6 Power Cable Connections Horn Ring Control positive ground vehicles with grounded horn ring or negative ground vehicles with grounded horn ring 7 TM 5 4210 228 14 amp P 1 SECTION IV CONTROLS Figure 8 Front Panel View All controls utilized during normal operation of the electronic siren are located on the front panel see figure 8 4 1 GAIN CONTROL The GAIN control is used to turn the electronic siren on and off Also it is used to control the volume when the electronic siren is used for public address or radio amplification Clockwise rotation of this knob turns the unit on Further rotation increases voice volume in the public address or radio amp
150. ej skotes eller anvandes reduceras namnda tider kraf tigt Spillfiltret bytes endast vid verkstadsbesok Filtret skall forhindra att damm och smuts faller ned forgasaren d ovriga filter de monteras Each time the main filter is taken out of the filter housing this housing is to be cleaned The fitting of a new or washed and re oiled filter is to be carried out at the same time intervals as those stated above or when required If the pre filter is not properly looked after or not used at all the times mentioned are reduced to a great extent The spill filter may only be changed by an authorized workshop The function of this filter IS to prevent dust and dirt from falling down into the carburetor when the other filters are removed Jedesmal wenn das Hauptfilter aus dem Fil tergehause genommen wird mu das Filter gehause abgetrocknet werden Fur den Fil terwechsel oder die Filterwasche und einolung gelten die gleichen Zertintervalle wie oben oder bei Bedarf Wenn das Vorfil ter nicht gewartet oder verwendet wird ver kurzen sich die Intervalle fur den Haupt filterwechsel erheblich Das Leckfilter ist nur bet Werkstattbesuchen auszutauschen Es soll verhindern da Staub und Schmutz in den Vergaser fallen wenn ubrige Filter ausgebaut werden Chaque fois que le filtre principal est sorti du carter de filtre le carter de filtre doit tre nettoye et s che Les remplacements ou lavages et huilage de filtre doivent tre faits a
151. ely vent pressure and discard after destroy ing internal and external threads to prevent reuse Depressurize disconnect high pressure line to cylinder and push lever to safely vent pressure and replace with factory filled and sealed cartridge Install safety shipping cap on empty cartridge and return to supplier for refill Remove and replace with factory filled and sealed cartridge returning replaced cartridge Disassemble clean replace affected parts and conduct operation test see Maintenance Section or replace Clear vent with stiff unbreakable probe of lesser diameter than vent hole See Nozzle Section 7 7 7 8 Blank CONTENTS ITEM Page TCK 8 3 Tank and Piping Layout a Dry Chemical Tank pep u u IRE AFFE Tank auna Cylinder PIPINO EE Actuation PIPING wie nnn eee Hose Reel iii e Twinned Nozzle Remote Actuati n Device eer te ie Ea eua a Lo vaa vea aad QO Valve with Pneumatic Actuator Pneumatic Valve Actuator e TWIN essen bau cresce eed Hand Valve and Pneumatic Actuator Dashboard Actuator ea 8 1 8 2 Blank TM 5 4210 228 14 amp P 1 PARTSLIST 5 4210 228 14 amp P 1 ANSUL TWIN AGENT FIRE FIGHTING TRUCK 891011 12 Twin Ag
152. en wrench With release valve B open fill jack with P F amp Hydraulic Fluid using clean oil can Fig 5 until Hydraulic Fluid flows out of filler hole 3 Tighten filler screw A and close release valve B Jack ram out to full length 4 Open release valve B retract ram and place a spacer D approximately 1 8 thick between ram coupling and ram housing Fig 5 Leave the release valve B open remove filler screw A and refill until oil flows out of filler hole and all air is expelled 5 Replace filler screw A and turn screw in approximately 1 1 2 turns Remove spacer D and with release valve B in open position allow excess oil and air to expel through the filler screw threads After the oil has finished flowing remove filler screw Replace filler screw and tighten securely Close release valve B and operate pump with full strokes Unit should extend ram approximately A in upside down position on the first stroke If am will not extend on first stroke unit is air bound and bleeding instructions must be repeated TM 5 4210 228 14 amp P 1 S Caufion rean instructions BEFORE USING THIS ZI HYDRAULIC UNIT The superior quality P F amp Hydraulic Unit has been thoroughly in spected and tested before leaving our factory If for any reason you find the unit does not operate perfectly OO NOT ATTEMPT TO MAKE REPAIRS RETURN THE COMPLETE UNIT TO THE P Fe DISTRIBUTOR FROM WHOM PURCHASED OR SEND THE COMPLETE UNIT TO THE NEAREST P Fa AUTH
153. ent 1350 PKP 200 AFFF Fire Fighting Truck Floor Mounted Switch International Chassis Specification 4x4 Siren PA Control System Spotlight Left Side Spotlight Right Side Warning Light 1350 PKP 200 AFFF Suppressing Securing System Rescue Saw Hydraulic Rescue Kit Aircraft Rescue Tool Kit Rescue Tool International Service Body Deck Light 2 Actuation Piping Not Shown Oylinder Piping Assembly Not Shown Identification Nameplate 8 3 TM 5 4210 228 14 amp P 1 ANSUL TANK AND PIPING LAYOUT 8 4 TM 5 4210 228 14 amp P 1 ANSUL TANK AND PIPING LAYOUT Kua DESCRIPTION QUANTITY PART NO Tank and Piping Layout DC Tank Assembly 1500 Lb AFFF Tank Assembly 200 Gal Tee 3 Nipple 3 x 3 Coupling Reducing 3 x 2 Nipple Close 2 Union 2 Hose 2 x 60 Elbow 2 x 900 Pipe 2 x 11 U Bolt Lockwasher 1 4 Hex Nut 20 UNC 1 4 Backup Plate Gasket Machine Screw Rd Hd 10 32 NF x 11 16 S S Lockwasher 10 S S Hex Nut 10 32 NF S S Ball Valve 2 and Actuator Assembly Valve Ball 2 Brass Not Shown Actuator Ball Valve Not Shown Union Swivel Adapter 2 Brass Coupling Reusable 2 Brass Hose 2 x 9 Coupling Reducing 3 x 1 1 2 Nipple Close 1 1 2 Coupling Reusable 1 1 2 Brass Hose 1 1 2 x 48 Elbow 1 1 2 x 900 Nipple 1 1 2 x 2 1 2 Bushing Reducing 3 x 2 Brass Pipe 2 x 11 Brass Elbow 2 x 900 Brass Bushing Reducing 3 x 1 1 2 Brass
154. er toward valve body while rotating cross shaft flat clockwise when facing cross shaft from the end with flat to STOP position d Close valve by turning handwheel on cylinder clockwise hand tighten 9 Pull ring pin and open BLUE hose clean out valve on dry chemical tank piping TM 5 4210 228 14 amp P 1 RECHARGE INSTRUCTIONS 10 Pull ring pin and open GREEN Vent Valve on AFFF tank piping to relieve all remaining pressure 11 Open dry chemical and AFFF handline nozzle s individually to relieve all remaining pressure NOTE DO NOT ATTEMPT TO RELIEVE PRESSURE THROUGH TURRETS 12 Remove fill cap from dry chemical tank and place funnel in opening 13 Fill tank to rated capacity with Ansul dry chemical specified on nameplate s only 14 Clean fill opening threads and gasket seating surface 15 Examine fill cap gasket for elasticity or cuts 16 Clean and coat gasket lightly with a good grade of high heat resistant grease 17 Inspect threads in fill cap and on fill opening for nicks burrs cross threading rough or feathered edges clean and coat fill cap threads lightly with a good grade of high heat resistant grease TM 5 4210 228 14 amp P 1 RECHARGE INSTRUCTIONS e lt K gt TM 5 4210 228 14 amp P 1 RECHARGE INSTRUCTIONS 18 Secure fill cap hand tighten 19 Remove fill cap from Ansul AFFF solution tank 20 Insert depth measuring rod into tank pushing it gently aga
155. erta Com Microphone Adapter Module SECTION III INSTALLATION 3 1 UNPACKING After unpacking the Model PA 2100 examine it for damage that may have occurred in transit If the equipment has been damaged file a claim immediately with the carrier stating the extent of the damage carefully check all envelopes shipping labels and tags before removing or destroying them If an adapter module was ordered is packed in a separate carton 3 2 GENERAL Before connecting any wires to the A 2100 install all revolving and flashing lights gunlocks trunk locks and other devices that will be controlled by the PA 2100 Route all wiring to the mounting location of e PA 2100 allowing 8 to 12 inches of extra wire at the siren location Install the vehicle speakers and route the speaker ads AWG 18 wire to the siren location Run leads to the vehicle s horn ring circuit Install the 50 ampere circuit breaker provided between the battery and the firewall as close to the battery as practical Install leads between the battery and the circuit breaker and the siren location using re no smaller than AWG 10 Install the ring between the ignition switch and the en installation site If desired all Ids at the PA 2100 may be terminated crimp on spade connectors 5 3 3 CONTROL MODULE ACCESSORY SWITCHES PA 2100 Only A General The PA 2100 Control Module is designed to accommodate up to four optional customer installed pushbutton switches Th
156. ervice comp tent line faut pas utiliser la d coupeuse avant d avoir pr alablement suivi une forma tion sp ciale sur la facon de l employer Montering av kaparm 1200 Demontera de bada Fyra skruvar ratt och bussning 1 Demontera fastskruven for kaparmen 2 remskyddskaporna Fitting the cutter arm K1200 Remove both the drive belt protecting casings 4 screws knob and bushing 1 Remove the attaching bolt 2 for the cutter arm Einbau des Trennarms K1200 Die beiden Riemenschutzkappen ausbauen 4 Schrauben Knopf und Buchse 1 Die Befestigungsschraube 2 fur den Trenn arm herausschrauben Montage du bras de disque d coupeur K1200 D monter les deux couvercles protecteurs de courroie 4 vis volant et douille 1 Demonter la vis de fixation 2 de bras de disque d coupeur 10 TM 5 4210 228 14 amp P 1 Passa skruven pa vilken ratten satt ar mens ovre h l och drag fast fastskruven 2 for hand Fit the bolt on which the knob was placed in the upper hole in the arm and tighten the attaching bolt 2 by hand Die Schraube an der der Knopf befestigt war in das obere Loch des Arms einpassen und die Befestigungsschraube 2 mit der Hand fest anziehen Introduire la vis dans le trou superieur de bras et serrer la vis de fixation 2 la main TM 5 4210 228 14 amp P 1 Lagg och spann den genom att vrida excentern 3 1 bottenlage medurs med
157. escribed If a positive horn ring circuit is used activate the Auxiliary Circuit the operation of the circuit is similar When the horn ring is depressed the positive voltage 14VDC causes CR110 to conduct so that positive voltage is applied to the base of 104 bringing Q104 into conduction Q104 en activates IC106 and the circuitry operates as previously described 5 4 MANUAL WAIL AND II The SIREN switch SW201 can operate the Manual Wail signal whenever the SELECTOR switch is set to MANUAL The Manual Wail signal can also be activated the horn ring or other auxiliary switch when the MASTER switch is set to position 3 When SW201 is depressed the base of 07 is grounded through R157 and CR207 turning on Q107 The conduction of Q107 simultaneously turns on Q106 Q103 and Preamplifier IC107 The conduction of Q103 allows the Tone Control Oscillator to begin generating a Wail signal The conduction of Q106 turns on the Driver Amplifier Q108 and Q109 As described in paragraph 5 3 if the MASTER switch on the Control Module is set to position 3 the Auxiliary Input circuit can activate the Manual Wail signal TAP Il operation is accomplished by the Auxiliary Input circuit in conjunction with IC105 and IC106 When an input is applied to the Auxiliary Input IC106 applies a positive pulse to IC105 3 causing IC105 1 to be grounded This ground is applied through R122 to Q102 bringing Q102 into conduction The conduction
158. ese switches are used to control various vehicle mounted devices There are two types of switches available Switches that meet the customer s requirements are selected at the placement of the order Switch types their descriptions and typical applications are listed in Chart 1 1 B Installation If no accessory switches are to be installed in the front panel of the Control Module disregard the procedure that follows CAUTION Do not change any factory wiring in the PA 2100 when the optional accessory switches are being installed Any change in the existing wiring may overload the circuitry and damage the unit 1 In order to wire the accessory witches it is necessary to remove the top over from the chassis To remove the over loosen the two hex head captive crews on the bottom of the unit and slide e cover off 2 Remove one hole plug a switch to be installed on the front panel of the Control Module Push the plugs out from the inside of the unit 3 Install the switches by inserting them into the desired holes in the front panel in accordance with the instructions provided with the switches Press the switches into the front panel until they snap in place 4 Pass all wiring to the accessory switches through the 1 hole in the rear panel of the Control Module Refer to Chart 1 1 for information concerning the wiring of the switches The wiring to each switch is determined by the device that the switch controls Follow the
159. estellt werden soll Der Knopf bleibt in dieser Lage und muB vor dem nachsten An werfen zuruckgefuhrt werden Choke Wenn der Motor beim Anlassen kalt ist mu der Choke geschlossen sein der Knopf wird nach hinten gedruckt Wenn der Motor warm ist ist eine Choke betatigung in der Regel nicht erforder lich Anwerfgassperre Gashebel und danach Anwerfgassperre eindrucken Wenn man den Gashebel losla t ist die Gaszufuhr in Halbgaslage gesperrt Zum Losen der Sperre muB der Gashebel ganz einge druckt werden Gashebel Mit dem Gashebel konnen die Drehzahl des Motors und die Geschwin digkeit der Kette reguliert werden Leerlaufsperre Die Sperre verhindert unfreiwilliges Gasgeben wenn der Motor Im Leerlauf lauft Bei Arbeiten mit der Sage wird die Sperre mit der Hand gelost die den hinteren Handgriff halt R glage A Bouton d arr t Lorsque le bouton est en fonc vers l arri re le moteur s arr te Le bouton reste dans cette position et doit tre remis en place pour que le prochain d marrage puisse tre effectu Bouton de starter Un moteur froid est mis en route avec un starter ferm le bouton est enfonc vers l arri re Un moteur chaud est g n ralement mis en route sans starter Blocage de d marrage Enfoncer la comm nde d acc l ration et ensuite le blocage de d marrage L cher la com mande d acc l ration et l acc l ration est bloqu e en position de semi acc l ration Le blocage est d gag quand l
160. f an effective vapor seal is present Sustained ignition means the solution should be replaced NOTE A hand held propane tank with a capillary tubing outlet and adjustment valve will readily provide a 1 inch long pilot flame Measurement of Expansion It is not necessary to perform this test unless irregularities are encountered in the Quality of Sample or Measurement of Concentration Tests 1 2 Extract at least 10 ml of solution from the premix solution prepared earlier Place precisely 10 ml in the clean 100 ml graduated cylinder Place stopper in graduate placing thumb over top of stopper Shake graduate in 900 arc hard and rapidly at least 25 times If any liquid is in evidence below foam bulk reshake TM 5 4210 228 14 amp P 1 TEST PROCEDURES ANSUL AFFF CONCENTRATE 10m 5 Push foam clinging to sides of graduate down into foam bulk with a spatula and read volume at top level of foam 6 Total volume of less than 40 ml corresponds to a foam expansion of less than 4 meaning solution must be replaced Ansul recommends that premixed solutions be inspected annually Should the quality of the Ansul AFFF solution be questioned for any reason improper mixing sediment improper storage temperatures etc it is recommended that the tests be performed immediately An Inspection Sheet Ansul Form No F 7880 is available for recording all test data Initial Inspection When first putting an Ansul AFF
161. g assembly Ansul Part N0 7013 to assure receiving correct replacement cartridge 4 18 TM 5 4210 228 14 amp P 1 RECHARGE INSTRUCTIONS c Raise puncture lever to assure safe cartridge installation d Screw cartridge into actuator hand tighten e Replace cartridge guard and insert ring pin through guard into puncture lever link f Seal with visual inspection seal Ansul Part No 15999 4 19 TM 5 4210 228 14 amp P 1 RECHARGE INSTRUCTIONS 49 Return all rescue equipment and properly secure 50 Make certain all doors are tightly latched 51 Record date of recharge 52 Notify operating personnel that the fire suppressing securing system is back in service 4 20 SECTION 5 To provide reasonable assurance that the fire suppressing securing system is fully charged and operable The inspection frequency will vary from hourly to weekly but shall not exceed one month based on the needs of the situation Inspections should always be conducted at regular intervals 1 Check general appearance of the fire suppressing securing system and components for mechanical damage or corrosion Check actuation and agent hose lines for wear especially at points where it passes through bulkheads Consult your truck owner s manual for chassis inspection 2 Make certain dashboard actuator ring pin is properly inserted and visual inspection seal is intact 3 Remove cartridge from dashboard actuator and examine d
162. gh R49 help in preventing thermal runaway SECTION VII SERVICE AND MAINTENANCE 7 1 SERVICE AND REPAIR Most of the component electronic parts used in the Interceptor are standard items that can be obtained from any radio or electronics supply shop To aid the repairman in isolating a malfunction and locating components a top chassis view figure 9 rear chassis view component location diagram figure 10 and schematic diagram are provided Any competent radio repairman or electronic technician should have no difficulty in tracing and correcting a malfunction should any occur When servicing the Interceptor the voltage chart table 1 and troubleshooting chart table 2 can be useful in isolating a malfunction For emergency replacement of any of the small components care must be used when soldering Heat easily impairs transistors capacitors and circuit boards It is therefore advisable to use longnose pliers or a similar heat sink on the lead being soldered When replacing output transistors insure that a matched pair is used Replace only with Federal part number 125B403 or Motorola 2N1560 Other transistors will burn out after a very short time Also use heat sink compound on both sides of the mica Insure that the mica is installed properly Improper Installation of mica could cause a short circuit Securely tighten transistor mounting screws NOTE Most cases of defective output transistors are caused by a defective spe
163. ghten e Replace cartridge guard and insert ring pin through guard into puncture lever link 2 11 TM 5 4210 228 14 amp P 1 ASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS f Seal with visual inspection seal Ansul Part No 15999 29 Make certain all rescue equipment is properly secured 30 Check that all doors are tightly latched 31 To give maximum assurance that the fire suppressing securing system will operate effectively and safely a maintenance examination could be effected at this time 2 12 TM 5 4210 228 14 amp P 1 ASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS 32 Instruct personnel in operation of the fire suppressing securing system 33 Record date of placement in service 2 13 2 14 Blank TM 5 4210 228 14 amp P 1 SECTION 3 OPERATION INSTRUCTIONS To operate the fire suppressing securing system 1 Pull ring pin push red button on dashboard actuator or lever on actuator in the rear of the vehicle 2 Forturret operation a Unlock control handles and open hand valve lever s to operate turret s b For FLAMMABLE LIQUID SPILL FIRE direct turret stream s at base of flames with side to side motion 3 For operation of hand line a Pull out ring pin on nozzle assembly holder and pull all hose from reel SX r TM 5 4210 228 14 amp P 1 OPERATION INSTRUCTIONS b Open nozzle s fully Pull trigger c For FLAMMABLE LIQUID SPILL FIRE direct stream s at base of flames with side to side motion
164. he cylinder does not need to be replaced One of the nitrogen cylinders of an Ansul fire suppressing securing system indicates a pressure of 1600 PSI 11030 kPa on the pressure gauge The temperature of the cylinder is 800 F 2670 C Reference to the chart shows that this is below the minimum recommended pressure for this temperature The cylinder should be replaced by a fully charged nitrogen cylinder F TM 5 4210 228 14 amp P 1 QUICK OPENING VALVE Ansul A4 TM 5 4210 228 14 amp P 1 ANSUL QUICK OPENING VALVE CROSS SHAFT FLAT CRESCENT RING ACTUATOR ARM TM 5 4210 228 14 amp P 1 AFFF 6 RECHARGE GUIDE Ansul A5 TM 5 4210 228 14 amp P 1 AFFF 6 RECHARGE GUIDE The amount of AFFF aqueous film forming foam concentrate necessary to complete a partial charge can be computed by measuring the depth of the solution remaining In the tank and referring to the chart below MEASURING TUBE AFFF CONCENTRATE DEPTH OF SOLUTION REQUIRED INCHES CENTIMETERS GALLONS LITERS 55 140 0 0 0 0 127 1 5 5 5 114 40 102 5 5 20 5 6 5 25 0 25 64 15 38 10 5 39 5 10 25 NI IEEE AAN MIRAA 200 GALLON 757 LITERS NOMINAL CAPACITY AFFF SOLUTION TANK FILL TO 2 INCHES 5 CENTIMETERS BELOW BOTTOM OF FILL OPENING A5 Ansul Part Number S 27776 Ignition Switch 6 32 volts 3 position off ignition ignition start Spring return to ignition position Silver inl
165. he negative terminal of the battery is connected to the vehicle frame the vehicle has a negative grounded system When the positive battery terminal is connected to the vehicle frame the vehicle has a positive grounded system 1 Negative Ground Installation Connect the red lead P3 pin 1 to the positive hot side of the battery terminal or ignition switch Connect the black lead P3 pin 2 to the vehicle frame sed figure 6 When making connections directly to the battery terminal proceed as follows FOOT SWITCH ALTERNATE CONNECTIONS Figure 5 Power Cable Connections Foot Switch Control 5 a Drill a 1 2 inch hole through the firewall on the battery side of the vehicle b Place a grommet in the newly drilled hole c Feed the black and red leads through the grommet and connect as previously described 2 Positive Ground Installation Connect the black lead to the negative hot side of the battery terminal or ignition switch Connect the red lead to the vehicle frame C Foot Switch A foot switch is provided to allow foot control of the siren in addition to the control provided by the front panel SIREN button Find a convenient mounting position on the vehicle floorboard and proceed as follows 1 Use the foot switch as a template and mark two positioning holes on the floorboard 2 Drill two 0 128 diameter 30 holes into the floorboard at the positioning marks 3 Connect one terminal of the foot swi
166. he producer of the concentrates The designated inspector should be a responsible and experienced person with a sound basic knowledge of fire equipment hardware and extinguishing agents A thorough briefing on the procedures to be followed should include the need for precise execution of each step in each test Any deviation from the indicated results of a given test may mean that the solution must be replaced If there is any doubt contact your Ansul representative A sample form is included within this booklet for use in recording Ansul AFFF test results Note that the form calls for initial test data This Information Is Important and required as a reference point for future tests Frequency And Accuracy Of Tests Separate tests are required for the concentrate and premix solution of Ansul AFFF Ansul recommends that premix solutions be inspected annually and that the concentrates be inspected once every five years If you should question the quality of your Ansul AFFF due to improper mixing storage etc the tests should be performed more frequently Most of the tests require that certain properties such as refractive indes expansion ratio etc be measured and compared with acceptable values minimize small variations in the results it is recommended that all tests except for Ouality of Sample be performed in triplicate and that the results be averaged This average value is then compared with the recommended values containe
167. he sale of our c electronic sirens e Ce FEDERAL son amp SIGNAL CORPORATION 2904309 ves gt OA FP HASSAN OIDO IR TM 5 4210 228 14 amp P 1 SECTION GENERAL DESCRIPTION Figure 1 Model PA 20A Interceptor Electronic Siren The FEDERAL Model PA 20A Interceptor Electronic Siren is a precision built compact solid state unit of advanced design The unit provides three distinct siren sounds plus provisions for public address manual siren operation and the amplification of radio messages The Interceptor ordinarily comes equipped for use with a 12 VDC power source positive or negative grounded system Any 75 watt commercial speaker 11 ohm impedance may be used with the PA 20A Your FEDERAL dealer has a full line of speakers that can be used with the PA 20A By use of an auxiliary switch such as a horn ring or foot switch the unit can be operated manually The unit can still be operated manually by depressing the SIREN button after the auxiliary switch 3 installed The microphone plug in convenience of the PA 20A allows the user to utilize the vehicle s two way radio microphone or an independent microphone Other features of the PA 20A include e Output isolation transformer to reduce the hazard of shorting the output transistors caused by instantaneous short circuits across the load i e rubbing of speaker coil Blocking transistor to increase thermal sta
168. hemical and AFFF system a AFFF discharge nozzle and an AFFF turret with pneumatic control valve TM 5 4210 228 14 amp P 1 INTRODUCTION Nitrogen System Five nitrogen cylinders provide the expellant gas for both the dry chemical and AFFF systems Each cylinder contains a Quick Opening valve with a pneumatic valve actuator for either local actuation by pulling the Quick Opening Lever or remote actuation from the dashboard or the hose reel The cylinder valve also contains a gauge for accurate pressure readings When the cylinders are opened the compressed nitrogen flows from the cylinder through high pressure hose into the regulators where the pressure is reduced to 210 to 230 psi and then flows through low pressure hose into the agent tanks This pressure forces the extinguishing agents through the discharge piping to both the handline nozzles and turrets The agent flow is then controlled by the operator by opening the nozzles or turrets Part of the nitrogen also runs through separate lines and is regulated to 125 psi to enable turret control valve operation A safety relief valve is located on the regulators and on each extinguishing agent tank to vent excess pressure in the event of regulator malfunction Control Valves The flow of nitrogen and extinguishing agent through each system is regulated by control valves Each valve is color coded to correspond to instructions given on the system nameplates and manual Hose Reel and Hoses A ro
169. hes 305 mm from bottom of fill opening NOTE DO NOT REPLACE FILL CAP AT THIS TIME 10 Pull ring pin and close RED Tank Valve 11 Pull ring pin and close BLACK Dry Chemical Valve TM 5 4210 228 14 amp 1 MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS 12 Pull ring pin and open BLUE hose clean out valve AFFF SOLUTION TANK 13 Remove fill cap from AFFF solution tank 14 Check pressure relief vent in fill cap for obstruction 15 Examine fill cap gasket for elasticity cuts cracking el gt TM 5 4210 228 14 amp P 1 MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS 16 Clean and coat gasket lightly with a good grade of high heat resistant grease 17 Inspect threads in fill cap and on fill opening for nicks burrs cross threading rough or feathered edges clean and coat fill cap threads lightly with a good grade of high heat resistant grease 18 Make certain AFFF solution level is about 2 inches 51 mm from bottom of the fill opening NOTE DO NOT REPLACE FILL CAP AT THIS TIME NOTE If annual maintenance examination is being conducted perform the steps as outlined in the Field Inspection Manual Ansul Part No 31274 in the back of this manual 19 Pull ring pin and close BLACK AFFF Valve TM 5 4210 228 14 amp 1 MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS 20 Pull ring pin and open BLUE clean out valve 21 Make certain hose reel is unlocked 22 Pull ring pin on nozzle assembly holder and pull all hose from reel
170. hes deep with small metal clips fitted at the top edge to restrain the screen from floating out of the container during the test a corrosion resisting 100 ml graduated measure a stopwatch and a flame source see Step No 6 In lieu of the blender to generate a foam sample a small sample of foam can be discharged through the system s foam nozzle Pour a carefully measured 600 ml of 98 per cent cyclohexane into the 1000 ml capacity graduated measure This procedure is essentially identical to TEST FOR FILM FORMATION AND SEALABILITY OF AFFF SOLUTIONS ACCORDING TO SPECIFICATION MIL F 24385 TEST PROCEDURE 4 7 6 TM 5 4210 228 14 amp P 1 TEST PROCEDURES PREMIXED ANSUL AFFF 600 Measurement of Film Formation and Sealability Quality Continued 3 Place a 100 ml sample of the premix solution to be tested in the blender and foam for 10 seconds at low speed or generate the foam sample by discharging a small amount of solution from the system s nozzle Pour 200 ml of this foam onto the fuel surface Insert the screen into the measure clip firmly into place and start your stopwatch After 1 minute of elapsed time pass a small 1 inch long flame six times around the fuel surface at a height of 1 2 inch 118 inch A small flash may occur but no sustained ignition shall result if an effective vapor seal is present Sustained ignition means the solution should be replaced NOTE A hand held propane tank with
171. hould be parallel for best holding TM 5 4210 228 14 amp P 1 HOW HOOK UP ATTACHMENTS ASSEMBLING CHAIN PULL KIT PRIM RAM SLIGHTL PROTECTOR RING Remove Ram Cap and Ram Screw Chain Pull Collar Extend Ram Piston slightly Protector Ring from Ram BU 287 on to Ram Cyl and screw Small Chain Cylinder inder Be sure threaded Attach BU 910 on to section of center hole is head of Ram Piston next to Ham Piston FIG A FiG B Pass small end of chain through the link hole of one of the BU 190 Bite Tite Clamps Fig A until hook end of Chain is several inches from Clamp Fig B CONTINUED ON NEXT PAGE c 10 vedi Wie TM 5 4210 228 14 amp P 1 a HOW TO HOOK UP ATTACHMENTS ASSEMBLING CHAIN PULL KIT CONT Next thread open end of Chain UP through Chain Pull Collar BU 287 over Small Chain Attachment BU 910 and down through other side of Chain Pull Collar Po sition Ram as closely as possible midway Next thread open end of Chain BU 911 into other Bite Tite Clamp BU 190 Re tract Ram Piston and take up slack Lock Chain in Bite Tite Clamp Links Close Pump Lever and start jacking operation Be sure to LOCK links of Chain BU 911 in slots of Clamp Links as shown above before starting pulling operations between Clamps for normal use When Ram Piston is fully extended and further pull is required retract Pisto
172. icrophone Connections 1 Obtain the Adapter Module that is appropriate for the make of two way radio in the vehicle Install the Adapter Module in accordance with the instructions supplied with the module 2 Plug the two way radio microphone into the receptacle on the Adapter Module The PA 2100 is now set for common microphone operation C Modification of Siren Amplifier for Positive PTT Circuits Perform the following modification only if the radio on your vehicle has a positive PTT circuit refer to the instructions provided with the adapter module 1 Slide the Siren Module out of the housing 2 Remove the Main Circuit Board from the module by removing the mounting screws and unplugging the Main Circuit Board from the Front Circuit Board Disconnect the rear connector J303 from the Main Board and lift the board away from the Chassis 3 Solder a length of AWG 22 bare wire between P201 and P202 on the foil side of the Front Circuit Board in the Siren Module Se amp figure 3 6 for the location of P201 and P202 4 Replace the Main Circuit Board in the Siren Module chassis When reconnecting J303 make sure that the color dot on the connector is next to the color dot on the board 5 Replace the Siren Module in the housing 3 8 IGNITION CIRCUIT Connect the terminal labeled IGN to the vehicle ignition or accessory circuit using AWG 16 wire This terminal supplies power to the panel light and pilot light as well a
173. id fullgas och obelastad kapskiva hors tydliga var at oner motorvarvtalet Detta ar normalt och bara ett tecken p att varvtalsregle r ngen fungerar Tomg ngsskruven t stalls n s att motorn gar p tomg ng utan att skivan roterar F rgasare P tabriken grundinstalls forgasaren Detta innebar ca 4 varv oppet b de hogvarvs n len H och l gvarvsn len L Tomg ngs Carburetor When delivered from the factory the carburetor is basically set This means about 3 4 turns open on both the high Speed screw H and the low speed screw L The idling screw t is to be screwed in 112 turns after contact with the throttle shaft lever After the saw has the been run warm the carburetor is ready for fine adjustment The low speed screw L Is to be set so that the engine does not stop at idling speed The high speed screw is to be set so that the engine runs well at full speed Then open the screw 1 4 turns The carburetor is fitted with an excess speed governor to prevent excessively high engine speed which would result in the cutter disc turning too fast At full speed and with unloaded disc you can hear clear variations of the engine speed This is normal and only a sign of the fact that the speed governor is working The idling screw t is set so that the engine runs at idling Speed without the disc rotating Vergaser Die Grundeinstellung des Vergasers wird im Werk vorgenommen Die Hochtouren schraube H
174. iedereinbau aufgescho ben ist sur le bras d coupeur et dans la gorge sur le disque qui se trouve sur l axe moteur Lorsque la courroie est en position correcte elle est plac e sur ia poulie du bras d cou peur Une nouvelle courroie doit tre tendue lors que deux r servoirs de carburant ont t utilis s ou bien une fois par semaine faut observer que le volant qui bloque le capot protecteur ne doit pas tre serr avant que la protection de courroie a t remise en place lors du r montage 15 Drivrem K1200 Vid strackning av drivremmen lossas skru ven som haller kaparmen genom att vrida medurs med hylsnyckeln som ngar verk tygssatsen och dra runt kapskivan n gra varv for hand Nar skruven lossats nagot stracks drivremmen genom den automatiska rem spannaren Vee belt K1200 To stretch the belt loosen the screw retain ing the cutting arm by turning clockwise using the socket wrench included in the tool set and rotate the cutter disc a few turns by hand When the screw has loosened slightly stretch the belt by using the automatic belt tens oner Antriebsriemen K1200 Zum Spannen des Antriebsriemens die Schraube durch die der Trennarm gehalten wird mit dem im Werkzeugsatz enthaltenen Schraubenschlussel im Uhrzeigersinn losen Gleichzeitig die Trennscheibe einige Um drehungen mit der Hand drehen Wenn die Schraube etwas gelost ist wird der Riemen durch den automatischen Riemenspanner gespannt
175. ight line relationship exists between refractive index and per cent Ansul AFFF concentration The refractive index is measured with the use of a refractometer such as the hand held AO TS Meter and Concentrimeter manufactured by the American Optical Corporation Scientific Instrument Division Buffalo NY 14215 This TS meter is available from many scientific supply companies at a cost of about 500 In lieu of purchasing the instrument many local laboratories will have bench models for determining refractive index Prior to mixing the premix solution or checking proportioner accuracy it will be necessary to plot a refractive index versus concentration curve Since the refractive index will vary somewhat with water type it is important that this curve be based on water taken from the same source used for your premix solution or your proportioner Plotting the Refractive Index Versus Concentration Curve 1 The following equipment will be required AO TS meter 100 ml graduated cylinder Medicine dropper Soft cloth or soft tissue 15 25 ml of your Ansul AFFF concentrate Sample of water used for premix or proportioning Grid for plotting the curve such as the one given on the back of the Field Inspection Record at the end of this manual Stirring rod 2 To plot the curve you will formulate Ansul AFFF and water solutions at 0 5 andl0 concentration by volume of Ansul AFFF concentrate to water The refractive index for each of these sol
176. imilaires Le bras d coupeur le capot protecteur et la courroie d entrainement sont d gag s de la m me facon que lors du remplacement de courroie d entrainement voir page 15 30 TM 5 4210 228 14 amp P 1 Skruven c som h ller lasstaget pa sprang skyddet tages bort och skyddet vrides ett halvt varv Vand armen 180 och satt tillbaka respektive detaljer och skruva fast samma satt som tidigare Observera att flansbrickan som h ller kap skivan har en speciallasning som inte loss nar d skivan andrar rotationsriktning The screw c retaining the locking stay at the safety casing is removed and the safety casing is turned through half a revolution Turn the arm 180 and then refit parts and screw into position as earlier Note that the flange washers retaining the cutter disc have special locking device which does not loosen when the cutter disc changes its direction of rotation Die Schraube mit der die Sicherungsstre be am Sprengschutz befestigt ist heraus schrauben und den Schutz eine halbe Um drehung drehen Den Arm um 180 wenden und die jeweiligen Teile wieder in ihre ur sprungliche Lage zurucksetzen und auf die gleiche Art wie fruher festschrauben Die Flanschscheibe fur die Trennscheibe hat eine Spezialsicherung die sich nicht lost wenn die Scheibe ihre Drehrichtung andert La vis c ou maintient le blocage sur le capot protecteur est enlev e et le capot est tourn d un demi tour Tourner l
177. ines the frequency of operation With the SELECTOR switch set to MANUAL Q1 and Q2 no longer function as a timing oscillator When a positive source is connected through an auxiliary switch to P3 pin 3 or when S1 is depressed Q2 turns on and allows C6 to charge While C6 charges the sweep oscillator frequency increases After releasing S1 or the auxiliary switch Q2 turns off and C6 discharges through R12 causing the sweep oscillator frequency to decrease The circuit will function in a similar manner when a negative source is connected through an auxiliary switch to P3 pin 4 6 3 HI LO TIMING OSCILLATOR The HI LO timing oscillator functions only when the SELECTOR switch is set to the HI LO position 10 When the switch is set to HI LO C7 charges through the base emitter junction of Q3 When the C7 charge voltage reaches the trip point of Q4 it immediately discharges through the anode cathode junction of Q4 The charge and discharge of C7 causes a rising and falling voltage with a repetition rate of approximately 45 cycles minute which turns Q3 n and off A square wave at the Q3 collector turns CR2 on and off When CR2 is not conducting the low tone is generated nd when CR2 conducts R15 in parallel with 13 the high frequency tone is generated he square wave at the junction of R13 and 14 is applied to the sweep oscillator 6 4 SWEEP OSCILLATOR The rising and falling voltages from the timing oscillators is applied to the
178. ing 15 released The cutting arm can then be pressed back and the belt removed Den Exzenter mit dem Zundkerzenschlussel entgegen dem Uhrzeigerzinn drehen so da die Federbelastung nachlaBt Danach den Trennarm zuruckdrucken und den Antriebs riemen abnehmen Tourner l excentrique l aide de la clef bougie dans le sens inverse celui des aiguilles d une montre pour que le ressort n excerce plus de tension Apr s quoi le bras de decoupage peut tre presse pour que la courroie d entrainement puisse tre enlevee Remspannaren best r av en kraftig fjader som spanns genom att excentern bilden vrids medurs s l ngt det g r Drivremmen spanns d av fjaderkraften exakt s mycket som erfordras Nar remmen ar ny skall den spannas efter 1 2 tankars korning Spanningen kontrol leras darefter dagligen The belt tensioner consists of powerful spring tensioned by turning the eccentric fig clockwise as much as possible The belt will then be tensioned by the spring power exactly as much as necessary A new belt should be tensioned after 1 2 refillings of the fuel tank Thereafter check the tension daily Der Riemenspanner besteht aus einer krafti gen Feder die mit Hilfe eines Exzenters ge spannt ist Der Exzenter soll im Uhrzeiger Sinn soweit wie moglich gedreht werden Der Antriebsriemen wird da durch die Federkraft genau soviel wie erforderlich gespannt Neuer Antriebsriemen soll nach 1 2 Ein fullungen des Kraftstofft
179. ing the spring cassette to the fan casing Anwerffeder auswechseln Die Seilscheibe wie oben beschrieben ausbauen Danach Schlitzschraube losen mit der die Federkassette am Ge blasegehause befestigt ist Remplacement du ressort de d marrage D monter le tambour d enroulement de la m me facon que celle qui est d crite ci dessus Enlever ensuite la vis qui maintient la cassette de ressort au capot deventilateur 23 Vor Einbau die se der Feder die Sell scheibe einpassen Die Anwerfvorrichtung funktioniert sicherer wenn die beweglichen Teile wie die Buchse der Seilscheibe sowie die Anwerfhaken mindestens einmal im Monat mit etwas Silikonol versehen werden Faire passer l ceillet du ressort dans le tam bour d enroulement avant le montage Le fonctionnement du systeme de d marrage est assur s le ressort de d marrage l axe de tambour d enroulement et les taquets de d marrage sont bien nettoy s et huil s l aide d huile silicone ou similaire au moins une fois par mois Luftfilter K65 Filtersystemet best r av forfilter 1 huvud filter 2 och spilifilter 3 Spillfiltret skall en dast bytas p behorig verkstad Forfiltret kan bytas utan verktyg och ar latt att gora rent Det skyddar huvudfiltret fr n att satta igen sig alltfor snabbt Air filter K65 The air filter systems consists of a pre filter 1 a main filter 2 and a spill filter 3 The spill filter may only be replaced by an authorized
180. inq and attach working head that is required Next screw SL Male Adapter into bottom of Ram Attach tub ing in lengths required Insert 51 1 Male Adapter into Tubing and attach desired base Work ing heads shown at top of illus tration may also be used on bottom of Ram amd vice versa RAM BOTTOM 4 e USE TUBING LENGTHS e AS REQUIRED 15 The P F Hydraulic Rescue Kit offers a choice of two entirely different methods of pulling operations de pending on the type of rescue work to be done and the working space available Both methods accomplish quick results through easily as sembled hook ups PULLING OPERATIONS The Pull Kit with Chain shown in sketches below is indicated for most types o accidents but when it is necessary to work in a very small area such as pulling together pickets on an iron fence or pressing objects together there is the addi tional choice of the Outboard Pull shown below HOOK UP FOR USING THE CHAIN PULL KIT Berga dctorutesbinbly HOOK UP FOR AN OUTBOARD PULL BU 775 RAM BOTTOM BU 238 Remove Ram Protector Ring and then screw Pull Guide BU 775 to Ram Cylinder Next attach choice of Flat Push Plate BU 580 Cleated Push Plate BU 581 or Rubber Anchor BU 700 to Ram Piston Next screw Pull Arm Assem bly BU 238 into bottom of Ram Screw a Male Adapter 51 1 into Pull Arm Assembly Tubing of de sired length passes through Pull Guide
181. inst bottom center to open intake valve 21 Determine AFFF solution depth and refer to Nameplate or Recharge Guide in Appendix A5 4 6 22 Raise level with fresh tap water to about one half the free space NOTE Ansul recommends that the quality of the tap water be examined each time the system is charged as described on Page 1 of the Field Inspection Manual Ansul Part No 31274 in the back of this manual The quality of water should be noted on the Field Inspection Record Form No F 7880 Appendix A2 23 Place funnel in fill opening and pour measured amount of ANSULITE AFFF Aqueous Film Forming Foam 6 Concentrate only determined from Recharge Guide in Appendix A5 NOTE Prior to adding the concentrate to the tank its refractive index should be measured and recorded on the Field Inspection Record Form No F 7880 along with a refractive index vs concentrate curve The procedures for these operations are covered on Page 1 of the Field Inspection Manual Part No 31274 at the back of this manual It is also a good idea to record the batch number s from the Ansul AFFF pails on the Field Inspection Record Form No F 7880 for future use If only a portion of the solution is being added the quality of water should be checked the refractive index should be measured and recorded and the batch number should be recorded TM 5 4210 228 14 amp P 1 RECHARGE INSTRUCTIONS lt gt TM 5 4210 2
182. installation instructions included with the devices and ensure that the device is properly fused 3 4 BRACKET MOUNTING The siren is shipped with a swinging mounting bracket that makes it possible to mount the unit in a variety of positions Positioning the bracket above the unit allows mounting on the underside of the dash Positioning the bracket below the unit permits mounting on any horizontal surface or in conjunction with Federal s TU7O Tunnel Mount on the vehicle s transmission hump MOUNTING UNDER DAS TM 5 4210 228 14 amp P 1 Mount the siren in a location that is convenient and comfortable to the operator and where it will not interfere with the safe operation of the vehicle Keep visibility and accessibility of controls in mind when choosing a mounting location To install the racket under the dash determine the mounting location and proceed as follows See figure 3 1 CAUTION The unit must be installed in an adequately ventilated area Never install the siren near heater ducts A Use the mounting bracket as a template and scribe two drill positioning marks at the selected mounting location under the dash B Drill two 1 4 inch diameter holes at the position marks C Secure the mounting bracket to the dash using two each of the following 1 4 20 x 3 4 hex head screws 1 411 split lockwashers and 1 4 20 nuts as shown in D Set the siren on the floor of the vehicle as close as possible to its final mounting l
183. isc seal should be un ruptured Return cartridge to actuator hand tighten TM 5 4210 228 14 amp 1 INSPECTION INSTRUCTIONS TM 5 4210 228 14 amp P 1 INSPECTION INSTRUCTIONS 4 Check that remote actuator ring pin is properly inserted and that visual inspection seal is intact 5 Check nameplates for readability 6 Read cylinder gauge s pointer should be in BLACK operating range and visual inspection seal s on valve s should be intact Jr P 7 Remove fill cap from dry chemical tank TM 5 4210 228 14 amp P 1 INSPECTION INSTRUCTIONS 8 Make certain tank is filled with free flowing Ansul dry chemical to a level of not more than 12 inches 305 mm from bottom of fill opening 9 Secure fill cap hand tighten 10 Make certain dry chemical tank valve handles are ring pinned and sealed in the operating position a RED Tank Valve OPEN b GREEN Vent Valve CLOSED TM 5 4210 228 14 amp 1 INSPECTION INSTRUCTIONS c BLUE Hose CleanOut Valve CLOSED d BLACK Dry Chemical Valve OPEN 11 Replace any broken or missing visual inspection seal s Ansul Part No 15999 12 Remove fill cap from AFFF solution tank 13 Make certain AFFF solution level is about 2 inches 51 mm from bottom of the fill opening 14 Secure fill cap hand tighten 15 Make certain AFFF solution tank valve handles are ring pinned and sealed in the operating position a GREEN Vent Valve CLOSED
184. istor NPN T1S92 Transistor NPN 2N2925 Diode ED 30025 Relay SPST Bosch Printed Circuit Board without parts Printed Circuit Bard with parts installed 29 TM 5 4210 228 14 amp P 1 Part No 106A121 108A122 107A207 107A211 115A311 125B432 120C146 122A144 143A127 140A114 140A163 143A106 141A117 141A118 233A126 Part No 8536A440 7002A000 06 7003A307 08 7069A018 7074A015 7011A012 08 8474A138 8536A418 8536A405 85360408 8536A420 Part No 100A255 1006237 147A113A 02 147A113A 01 8469A665 122B166 130C226 200C701 100A224 100A710 100A262 100A236 100A221 100A207 107A226 1074676 107A263 128A043 02 125B133 125B132 125A119 115B301 131A126 130C239 200C722 TM 5 4210 228 14 amp P 1 26A299B 579 Printed in the U S A INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS FOR MODEL FN 900 ADAPTOR MODULE FOR PA OVERRIDE OPERATION 1 Install the adapter module following the instructions in the siren service manual 2 Connect the brown zip cord across the radio speaker voice terminals 3 Plug the Model MNCT Microphone into J On the adapter module The siren is now set PA Override operation FNIOOK J 1424115 29081047 TM 5 4210 228 14 amp P 1 n CORPORATION PARTS INDEX MODEL CJ 24 SERIES A3 0043 PARTS PRICE LIST MODEL CJ 24 SPEAKER ASSY EFFECTIVE JUNE 1974 User s Net Each 1 85 0 10 33 00 0 75 0 15 0 10 0 25 15 00 0 10 0 10 Description Part
185. it Integrated RAC CD4066 AE Circuit Integrated National LM555C Circuit Integrated National LM358 Circuit Integrated RCA CD4027AE Circuit Integrated National LM380N Transistor NPN Silicon 2N2925 Transistor NPN Silicon 2N3702 Transistor NPN Silicon 2N5296 Transistor NPN Silicon TIS92 Transistor NPN Silicon TIS93 Transistor NPN Silicon 2N6109 Diode TO151 Diode Zener 11V 1 Watt Diod ED 3002S CL 1 MISCELLANEOUS Transformer Audio Transformer Driver Connector Wafer Main Circuit Board without parts Main Circuit Board with parts installed Part 00A255 004224 004237 07 634 47A113A 01 15B101 8469A665 22A167 22B164 39A161 233A103 30D229 200D702 115B301 8536401 122A165A 02 130D224 200D699 Part No 107A418 107A621 107A680 107A650 107A406 107A271 128A047 128A043 02 128A045 108A044 128A046 125A119 125A113 125A415 125B132 125A133 1254B431 115B101 115A245 115B301 120B123 120B145 140A170 130D228 200D703 Schematic Symbol R301 C301 C302 303 C304 305 CR117 Q301 302 T301 SW302 F301 P301 J302 Qty VES Schematic Symbol R401 402 403 404 R405 CR401 CR402 403 404 DS401 SW401 R701 R702 R703 R704 R705 706 R707 708 C701 C702 703 C704 705 706 707 10701 CR701 702 703 704 705 106 707 K701 702 CHASSIS MOUNTED COMPONENTS PARTS LIST Description
186. itrogen Cylinder Tank Capacity Operating Pressure Truck Twin Agent Fire Fighting 24 200 GVW Model 1854 4x4 Diesel Driven Commercial 243 0 In 94 0 In 127 0 In 162 0 In 24 200 Lb 20 200 Lb International Harvester Company Truck Division 1854 4x4 Chassis and Cab Diesel Driven Commercial Ansul Fire Protection Wormald U S Inc 1350 PKP Ansul PKP Purple K Mil F 22287 Nitrogen 400 Cu Ft 2640 PSI at 70 F 1350 Lb PKP 210 230 PSI 200 AFFF Ansul AFFF 6 Per Cent Concentrate Mil F 24385C Nitrogen 400 Cu Ft 2640 PSI at 70 F 200 Gal 210 230 PSI 3 5 5 4210 228 14 amp 1 INTRODUCTION TABLE OF SPECIFICATIONS CONT Hose Reel Manufacturer Model Dimensions Height Width Length Twin Agent Hose Hose Diameter Dry Chemical Inside Hose Diameter AFFF Agent Inside Hose Length Dry Chemical Nozzle Manufacturer Part No Hose Connection Rate Effective Range AFFF Nozzle Manufacturer Part No Hose Connection Rate Effective Range Dry Chemical Turret Manufacturer Part No Hose Connection Rate Effective Range Pattern Width Aero Motive Mfg Company EAD 29 14 19 With Electric Rewind 31 75 In 31 75 In 29 00 In 1 0 In 1 0 In 100 Ft Ansul Fire Protection Wormald U S Inc S 27762 1 1 2 Male NPTF x 1 1 2 Female NPSM Swivel Union 7 8 Lbs Sec 77 0 Ft Elkhart Brass Manufacturing Corporation 25501
187. ive and or defective blocking transistor Q12 Open capacitor C15 Open capacitor C6 or C7 Defective loudspeaker Defective transistor Q10 Q11 or Q12 Improper adjustment of R30 Microphone transfer switch in C position Open capacitor C11 Defective microphone Microphone transfer switch in M position Defective transistor Q3 or Q4 Open capacitor C13 or C14 Defective resistor R3 or R5 Open capacitor C6 Open capacitor C3 Open capacitor C5 Open capacitor C4 Defective transistor Q5 or Q6 Electrical leakage at auxiliary switch due to dirt or moisture Switch resistance should not be less than 10K ohms Short circuit in microphone There should be an open circuit between pin 2 and shell of microphone plug Open capacitor C20 Defective capacitor C8 and or defective diode CR3 Voltage drop in power lead Connect amplifier directly to battery terminal SCHEMATIC SYMBOL R1 28 R2 11 12 R7 18 29 R8 35 Q1 2 3 5 6 7 8 Q4 Q9 Q10 11 Q12 TM 5 4210 2228 14 amp P 1 PARTS LIST PART SCHEMATIC PART DESCRIPTION NUMBER SYMBOL DESCRIPTION NUMBER RESISTORS CAPACITORS 1 5K ohm 100A220 C1 2 21 0 01 UF 107A223 27K ohm 5 100A244 Ceramic Disc 10K ohm 596 100A257 C3 6 82 UF 10V 107A624 39K ohm 5 100A260 Tantalum 18K ohm 596 100A258 C4 5 3 9 UF 15V 107A625 470 ohm 100A255 Tantalum 1K ohm 100A202 C7 13 14 10 UF 10V 107A634 150 ohm 100A238 Tantalum 8 2K 596 100A233 C8 19 20 250 UF 15V 10
188. junction of R24 and R25 The voltage at this point determines the bias voltage at Q5 and Q6 which function as an astable multivibrator R4 and CR5 are used to set the DC bias of the transistors The output of the sweep oscillator is a series of square waves frequency determined 500 Hz to 1400 Hz by the bias voltage This frequency increases when the bias voltage increases and decreases when the bias voltage decreases 6 5 MICROPHONE PRE AMP The microphone pre amplifier is used only when S3 is set to the TM position magnetic microphone and the SELECTOR switch is set to PA The signal from a magnetic microphone is applied through S3 to the base of Q7 The low level signal is amplified by Q7 flows through S3 S2G and the GAIN control to the base of Q8 6 6 EMITTER FOLLOWER AND DRIVER An output from the sweep oscillator microphone pre amplifier carbon or transistorized microphone or two way radio is applied to the base of Q8 Transistor Q8 functions as an emitter follower providing a high input and low output impedance The output of Q8 is applied to the driver Q9 amplified and transformer coupled to the output stage TM 5 4210 228 14 amp P 1 6 7 OUTPUT AMPLIFIER Transistors Q10 and Q11 operate as a Class B push pull amplifier The output of the amplifier is transformer coupled to the speaker Transistor Q12 and diode CR6 provide protection should the power leads be reversed Q12 along with resistors R46 throu
189. l which gives rise to intensive dust Bei jedem Tanken sollte das Vorfilter abge zogen und saubergeschuttelt werden Das Vorfilter ist nach ca 30 Betriebsstunden tn Stahlmaterial und nach ca 20 Betriebsstun den in Beton oder ahnlichem Material das kraftige Staubbildung verursacht auszu wechsel oder grundlich zu washen Le prefiltre doit tre enlev et il faut faire tomber les impuret s qu peuvent y trouver en le secouant lors de chaque remplissage ll doit tre lave minutieusement ou etre rem plac apr s environ 30 heures d utilisation de la machine lors de decoupage dans le metal ou apr s environ 20 heures de marche lors de d coupage dans le b ton ou autres matieres similaires donnant lieu un grand degagement de poussiere TM 5 4210 228 14 amp P 1 Huvudfiltret demonteras genom att lossa muttrarna som h ller filterhuset och lyfta av detta Huvudfiltret ar ett pappersfilter av spe ciell kvalitet som inte far tvattas eller blasas rent Filtret far endast skakas rent Om man tvattar bl ser eller rengor med verktyg ska das filtret och blir oanvandbart Remove the main filter by loosening the nuts retaining the filter housing and lifting off the housing The main filter is a paper unit of a special quality grade which must not be washed or blown clean The filter may only be shaken clean Washing blowing clean or attempts to clean the filter by using tools damage it to such an extent that it is ruined Zum Ausba
190. le 33 Close nitrogen cylinder valves a Push GREEN Pressure Relief Valve Button to relieve pressure in cylinder actuation system manifold b Turn handwheel counterclockwise to OPEN position TM 5 4210 228 14 amp P 1 MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS TM 5 4210 228 14 amp 1 MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS c Push Quick Opening lever toward valve body while rotating cross shaft flat clockwise when facing cross shaft from end with flat to STOP position d Close valve by turning handwheel clockwise hand tighten 34 Open dry chemical and AFFF nozzles to relieve pressure remaining in piping and hose lines NOTE DO NOT ATTEMPT TO RELIEVE PRESSURE THROUGH TURRET 35 Open GREEN vent valve on AFFF tank to relieve residual pressure due to check valve in AFFF product line 6 10 a RED Tank Valve b GREEN Vent Valve c BLUE Hose Clean Out Valve d BLACK Dry Chemical Valve OPEN CLOSED CLOSED OPEN TM 5 4210 228 14 amp 1 MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS TM 5 4210 228 14 amp 1 MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS 37 Insert ring pin s through handle s in bracket s and seal with visual inspection seal s Ansul Part No 15999 38 Secure dry chemical tank fill cap hand tighten 39 Return all AFFF solution tank valve handles to operating position a GREEN Vent Valve CLOSED b BLUE Hose Clean Out Valve CLOSED 6 12 TM 5 4210 228 14 amp P 1 MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS c BLACK AFFF
191. le stiff inoperable or leaking Corroded plugged dented broken or missing Cut cracked abraded or deformed exterior Corroded or cracked coupling s swivel joint or ferrule Corroded cross threaded or worn coupling threads Internal blockage Coupling gasket s brittle compression set cut cracked or missing Wrong nozzle Valve body or barrel abraded corroded cracked or dented Operating handle broken or deformed 7 5 TM 5 4210 228 14 amp P 1 SERVICE AND REPAIR CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace seal s Replace ring pin s Remove repair and reassemble or replace Disconnect disassemble and clean replacing parts as required Clean repair and test before reinstalling or replace valve s Replace entire hose assembly or hose only if coupling s are reusable type Replace entire hose assembly or coupling s only if reusable type Replace entire hose assembly or coupling s only if reusable type Clear by blowing dry air or nitrogen at 220 PSI through hose CAUTION Do not leave open end of hose unattended unless adequately re strained to prevent whipping endangering life safety Replace lubricating clean new gasket s lightly with a good grade of high heat resistant grease before insertion Replace with type nozzle recommended by the manufacturer Ansul Replace valve or barrel if in any way damaged or deformed Replace handle COMPONENT Nozzle s Continued
192. le to extend Ram to desired length TO RETRACT RAM No pumping is necessary to retract Ram another time saving feature which allows quick changes o hook ups Mere ly turn the Control Lever one half turn counter clockwise or away rom hose end and ram retracts itself The Control Lever gives you micro control of the Ram at all times and enables you to stop it at any desired point and hold it there ALL POSITION RAM The P F Hydraulic Ram works in ALL POSITIONS through 360 always ready in any position to pinpoint ten tons of pressure wherever needed It will even work upside down TM 5 4210 228 14 amp P 1 ATTACHAENTS BU 580 FLAT PUSH PLATE A flatsurfaced Push Plate that can be used either as Base or on end of Ram Piston whenever wide flat secure pushing surface is required BU 581 CLEATED PUSH PLATE hs pointed cleats give a positive anchor in wood dirt asphalt or any other soft material Eliminates the necessity for notching trees or timbers with axe or saw to provide a flat anchoring surface Use on either end of ram as needed BU 906 V PUSHING CAP The 90 angle provides positive anchorage in or angles where flat plate would not fit Also _ ves concentration of power for specific operations such as diagonal pushing Use on either end of ram as needed BU 913 HEAVY DUTY V NOTCH CAP Use as a base for holding jack in positio
193. ley fitted to the engine shaft When the belt is in tts correct position fit it in the cutter arm pulley slot A new vee belt must be re tightened now and them preferably after two full tanks of fuel have been used up and then every week Note that the knob securing the safety casing Is not tightened until the belt protector has been slid into position during re assembly Austausch des Antriebsriemens K65 Zum Austausch des Antriebsriemens mu das Kupplungsgehause ausgebaut werden Dieses ist mit drei Schrauben befestigt von denen eine von oben eingeschraubt ist hinter der Handgriffkonsole Die Schraube fur die Riemenspannung muf ganz zuruck geschraubt werden Den Riemen neben der Riemenscheibe auf Remplacement de la courroie K65 Lors du remplacement de la courroie d en trainement le couvercle d accouplement doit tre d mont Trois vis maintiennent le couvercle dont une est viss e la partie sup rieure derri re le support de poign e La vis de tension de courroie est d viss e enti rement La courroie est plac e le long de la den Trennarm und in die Nut an der Scheibe legen die auf der Motorwelle sitzt Nun kann der R emen auf die R emenscheibe am Trennarm gefuhrt werden Ein neuer Antriebsriemen mu nach etwa zwei Tankfullungen und anschlieBend ein mal pro Woche nachgespannt werden Der Drehgriff der den Sprengschutz fixiert darf erst angezogen werden wenn der Rie menschutz beim W
194. lic Rescue Kit PK 4 Ansul Part No S 52536 A10 TM 5 4210 228 14 amp P 1 THERE S DEI SERVICE STATION NEAR YOU FOR YOUR CONVENIENCE Authorized P Fe Service Stations specializing in the repair and service of P Fe Hydraulic Jacks are located in principal cities in every section of the country These stations are staffed with expert workmen trained in all phases of jack maintenance and repairs Con tact the station nearest you they will be glad to help you quickly and reasonably Please do not send jacks to our factory but to the P Fe SERVICE STATION NEAREST YOU ALABAMA Hydraulic Service Company 3000 4th Ave S Birmingham Southern Jack Company 615 North 9th Ave Birmingham ARIZONA Jacks Inc 1909 E Washington St Phoenix CALIFORNIA Valley Hydrauiics 520 Van Ness Fresno L amp G Speciatities 524 Houston St Sacramento Hydraulic Services 5227 University Ave San Diego California Service Tool amp Supply 435 Peralta Ave San Leanoro A t Hydraulics 666D Stockton Ave San Jose Jack X Change 1556 W Embassy Anaheim COLORADO Merrill Hydraulic Specialists 12th and Acoma Denver Hilliker Hydraulics 734 Santo Fe Denver CONNECTICUT J amp S Hydraulic Jack Repairing 45 Old Gate Lane Milford A amp L Eastern Hydraulic Inc 51 Farren Ave New Haven DISTRICT OF COLUMBIA 1811 14th St N W Washington FLORIDA Broward Hydraulic Jack ServiceCo 3811 Davie Blvd Fort Lauder
195. lification mode The GAIN control does not control the volume of the siren Radial lines around the knob can be used for setting the volume to a predetermined level The maximum clockwise setting of the control will be determined in most cases by the point at which feedback or squeal occurs This will depend upon the microphone gain open windows speaker placement proximity of reflecting surfaces buildings or other vehicles etc Adjust the GAIN control to a position just low the point at which feedback occurs 4 2 SIREN BUTTON The SIREN button located on the left hand side of the front panel is used to activate the siren when the SELECTOR witch is in the MANUAL position 4 3 SELECTOR SWITCH The SELECTOR switch is a six position rotary switch used to select the mode of operation f a common microphone is used or the electronic siren and two way radio he switch will disconnect the microphone from the radio s transmitter section only when the switch is set to P A The following are positions on the SELECTOR switch A RADIO In this position incoming radio messages are amplified by the electronic siren Volume can be controlled by the GAIN control The radio volume may be adjusted to match the P A volume by means of the resistor control located on the rear panel of the electronic siren sed figure 4 B P A In this position the electronic siren may be used as a public address system Volume is controlled
196. ll away See hook up on Pages 12 13 14 15 See Page 17 DEPARTMENT NOTES 19 TM 5 4210 228 14 amp P 1 ONE MAN CAN TRANSPORT HOOK UP and USE A P F RESCUE KIT TO SAVE LIVES PULLING Here the Chain Pull Kit is being P F Ram with Tubing Extensions be used to pull back panel of car to ing used to keep weak wall from EE free victims in rear seat See hook collapsing For hook up see up on d Pages 12 13 14 15 SPREADING OPENING Spreading crotch of tree to release Forcing open locked door See hook victim s foot Cleated Push Plate and up on Pages 13 14 15 Ram Base eliminate notching tree for anchorage See hook up on Page 17 DEPARTMENT NOTES 20 TM 5 4210 228 14 amp P 1 THERE S A P FHOOK UP POSSIBLE to SOLVE any RESCUE PROBLEM cm BRACING LIFTING Fallen tunnel shaft being braced to Cyclone felled trees being raised allow rescue workers to speed up away from accident victim For cave in rescue For hook up see hook up see Pages 12 13 14 Pegas 1221331414 OPENING TRANSPORTING Spreader is being used to open P F Rescue Kits can go anywhere o metal trap door leading to base man can go They are independent ment Hook up selPage 17 of outside power sources and can be used safely near inflammables where torches cannot be employed Canvas carrying case permits man to take only essential parts over ladders or into difficult or hazardous lo
197. ll not slip off during the pull opera tion They are easily and quickly attached by only finger pressure on two bolts and will hold the thinnest metal without slipping Reversible jaws enable clamps to be used over raised edges when necessary Used with BU 287 and BU 288 Use wrench on bolts for positive holding of clamps BU 238 PULL ARM ASSEMBLY For use with Pull Guide BU 775 in all pulling and clamping operations Attach SL 1 plus tubing to get rect span See pages 16 and 18 BU 775 PULL ARM GUIDE Attaches to Ham Cylinder for use with Pull Arm Assembly BU 238 in all pulling and clamping opera tions See pages 16 and 18 BU 705 AND BU 700 RUBBER ANCHORS flat topped rubber anchor that can be used either on Ram Bottom or on Ram Piston to provide maximum slip resistance when jacking against smooth slick wet or glassy surfaces BU 910 SMALL CHAIN ATTACHMENT Used in conjuction with Chain Pull Collar BU 287 Chain and Clamps Attaches to Ram Piston to guide Chain in all pulling operations BU 287 CHAIN PULL COLLAR Screws on Ram Cylinder for use with Chain and clamps in all pulling operations BU 931 SHORT CHAIN WITH 2 HOOKS For quickly connecting two lengths of chain together for additional length when needed BU 911 CHAIN 2 in kit For use with Chain Pull Kit Two 6 long diameter chains enable operator to make any hook up required In heavy duty pulling opera tion the Chain Pull Ki
198. lorsque le moteur est en marche Le protecteur doit toujours tre en place Le disque d coupeur ne doit pas tre maintenu en biais ou tre bloqu dans la gorge Contr ler que le disque n est pas en contact avec un objet quelconque avant que le moteur soit mis en route 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 Lorsqu on porte la machine le moteur doit toujours tre arr te et le silencieux doit tre orient dans le sens inverse celui du corps de l utilisateur ll ne faut jamais travailler avec une d coupeuse endommag e ou mal r gl e ou bien encore avec une d coupeuse il manque une pi ce quelconque ou bien encore l le montage des pi ces n a pas t ex cut de facon conforme Contr ler que le disque cesse de tourner lorsque la commande d acc l ration est l ch e Le moteur doit toujours tre arr t avant que la machine soit d pos e sur une surface quelconque Les poign es doivent tre bien s ches propres et bien d barrass es de toute trace d huile et de carburant ll ne faut employer la machine que dans les endroits la ventilation est satis faisante Non observation peut occa sionner des blessures ou la mort Le disque d coupeur doit tre enlev de la d coupeuse lors de transport ou lors de d p t Toutes mesures de service d entretien en plus des points mentionn s dans les instructions d entretien du fabricant doivent tre ex cut es par un personnel de s
199. loy e au moins quatre heures par jour Si par contre la decoupeuse est employee pendant une moins longue periode par jour les plus courts intervalles peuvent tre prolong sans risque Partie de la decoupeuse Protecteur Reglage Dispositif de mise en route Filtre a air Prefiltre Filtre principal Filtre de trop plein Carburateur Bougie Moteur Courroie d entrainement Reservoir de carburant Vis et ecrous Mesures prendre Contr le de fonctionnement Contr le de fonctionnement Nettoyage et graissage des parties mobiles Le secouer Nettoyage remplacement Nettoyage remplacement Nettoyage ajustage Contr le et ajustage de la distance entre les electrodes Remplacement Nettoyage des ailettes de refroidissement Nouvelle courroie tendre apres d apr s contr le de la tension Remplacement de la cartouche filtrante Contr le du serrage 33 Ausfuhrung immer immer monatlich bei jedem Tanken siehe Seite 25 und 27 be Werkstattbesuch bei Bedarf bei Bedarf alle 2 Monate alle 2 Wochen nach 1 2 Einfullungen des Kraftstofftanks taglich mindestens einmal pro Jahr wochentlich A ex cuter toujours toujours chaque mois chaque remplissage voir page 25 et 27 dans un atelier autoris au besoin au besoin toutes les deux mois toutes les deux semaines 1 2 remplissage carburant chaque jour une fors par an au moins chaque semaine Arbetsteknik Vid kapn
200. mpany DR 139 1 9 1 10 Blank SECTION 2 To prepare the Ansul suppressing securing system for placement in service 1 Remove all cord wrapping and banding ties from system and component parts except on hose reels 2 Examine entire system and component parts for concealed shipping damage 3 Remove fill cap from dry chemical tank and place funnel in opening 4 Fill tank to rated capacity with Ansul dry chemical specified on nameplates only NOTE Certain dry chemical systems are filled before shipment NOTE Do not overfill TM 5 4210 228 14 amp P 1 ASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS 5 4210 228 14 amp P 1 ASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS 5 Clean fill opening threads and gasket seating surface 6 Secure fill cap hand tighten 7 Remove fill cap from AFFF solution tank 8 Fill tank one half full with fresh tap water NOTE Ansul recommends that the quality of the tap water is to be examined each time the system is charged as described on Page 1 of the Field Inspection Manual Ansul Part No 31274 in the back of this manual The quality of water should be noted on the Field Inspection Record Form No F 7880 TM 5 4210 228 14 amp 1 ASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS 9 Place funnel in fill opening and pour 13 7 gallons 51 9 1 of ANSULITE AFFF Aqueous Film Forming Foam 696 Concentrate into tank NOTE Prior to adding the concentrate to the tank its refractive index should be measured and recorded
201. n to same position as at start of pull take up slack in Chain and repeat operation For each inch of Ram travel the Chain travels TWO inches which gives longer pull without having to change the hook up total pull travel of 114 without changing hook up Bite Tite Clamps will not slip off during pulling operations as the more pull that is exerted the lighter they hold They attach and detach in a matter of seconds Pull Kits give positive pulling oper ations in quicker time Ram may be located in any desired place on chain so that Ram is always in open area away from interference 11 TM 5 4210 228 14 amp P 1 PUSHING and LIFTING CONFINED AREAS The Hydraulic Rescue Kit offers many different combinations of attach ments to do every kind of pushing or lifting operation efficiently and quickly The illustrations below show the attachments that can be screwed directly on the Ram Piston to quickly release victims of automobile accidents pushing up panels tops doors seats steering posts and motors in collapsed buildings lifting beams and debris in moving maternal in excavations and cave ins in street car train plane and industrial accidents Shown below are attachments ior working in confined areas BU ATTACHMENTS MEE FOR RAM PISTON 80 912 Sch BU 581 V 80 905 PISTON xiv E BU 907 RAM ATTACHMENTS RAM Al of the above attachments may also be used on the bot i
202. n foreg ende meddelande dar om AB PARTNER Foreword If your new cutting machine 15 to be the good PARTNER you have every right to expect we should like to underline the importance of certain inspections and maintenance being carried out at regular intervals The power cutter is a machine with a high cutting capacity and it is fitted with safety features to make the work carried out as s fe as possible If the safety features are out of operation or if the machine s used carelessly or wrongly the resuit can be injuries suffered by the operator or people in the immediate vicinity For this reason you should read through the safety regulations on page 7 very carefully Under no conditions may a power cutter be modified from its original design except with the permission of the m nufacturer In writ ing Non authorized modlfications can im ply considerable safety risks The manufacturers reserve the right to carry out modifications without previous notice AB PARTNER TM 5 4210 228 14 amp P 1 Vorwort Damit die neue Motortrennsage Ihren mit Recht gestellten Erwartungen entsprechen kann mochten wir die Bedeutung davon her vorheben da die Trennsage eine regelmas sige und richtige Wartung erhalt Die Trennsage besitzt eine hohe Schneid kapazitat Eine Reihe von S cherheitseinrich tungen gewahrleistet groBmogliche Sicher heit beim Arbeiten mit dieser Maschine Falls diese Sicherheitsdetails jedoch auBer Funk tion sind
203. n when pushing front or rear cross members into alignment BU 586 CLEATED RAM BASE Steel cleat in center anchors ram securely in soft materials When anchoring in trees poles timbers or BU 586 brick walls no time is wasted in notching to provide flat anchoring surface because cleat holds securely Use on bottom end of ram When used with BU 581 the base acts as a pivot to insure full bearing surface BU 904 BU 904 JACK SPREADING TOE Screws on Ram Cylinder Toe Plate can be used in any p i position to combine with BU 905 Jack Piston Spreading Toe below for use in spreading or lifting operations BU 905 JACK PISTON SPREADING TOE Screws on Ram Piston Toe Plate can be used in any BU 905 position to combine with BU 904 Jack Spreading Toe above for use in spreading or lifting operations BU 912 LONG SPREADING TOE Screws on Ram Piston Toe Plate can be used in any position to combine with BU 905 Jack Spreading Toe Cabove for use in spreading operations U 912 BU 907 OFFSET SPREADING TOE Directs power to the side for offset pushing Particu iy useful in narrow openings Offset permits positive align ment when pushing at a 90 angle Use on either end U 907 of Ram TM 5 4210 228 14 amp P 1 ATTACHMENTS BU 190 BITE TITE CLAMPS 2 in kit alias An exclusive feature of the P F Hydraulic Rescue Kit Bite Tite Clamps have serrated jaws for positive grip ping of metal and wi
204. ndanlage Zundkerze Elektrodenabstand Vergaser Drehzahlregulierung Regulierbereich Kraftstoff lgemisch mit PARTNER I Tankfullmenge TRENNZUSATZ Trennscheibe 12 K65 12 K1200 12 K1200 14 K1200 Donn es techniques Moteur refroidi par air 2 temps cylindr e Allumage syst me d allumage Transistor bougie cartement des lectrodes Carburateur protection d emballement tendue de r glage Carburant m lange de lubrifiant avec huile PARTNER volume de r servoir OUTILLAGE D ABATTAGE disque 12 K65 12 K1200 12 K1200 14 K1200 K65 65 cm PARTNER IGNITRON Bosch WKA 225 T3 0 5 mm Tillotson HS 175 A 9 600 400 4 1 25 2 1 50 0 751 etzung K65 65 cm PARTNER IGNITRON Bosch WKA 225 T3 0 5 mm Tillotson HS 175 A 9 600 400 4 96 1 25 2 1 50 0 75 litres d multiplication 7 Nan ONOO i sch sch TM 5 4210 228 14 amp P 1 K1200 100 cm PARTNER IGNITRON Bosch WKA 225 T6 0 8 mm Tillotson HS 175 A 9 600 400 4 1 25 2 1 50 1 01 Max Umfangsgeschwindigkeit 80 m s 80 m s 100 m s 100 m s K1200 100 cm PARTNER IGNITRON Bosch WKA 225 T6 0 8 mm Tillotson HS 175 A 9 600 400 4 125 2 1 50 1 0 litres vitesse p riph rique maxi du disque 80 m s 80 m s 100 m s 100 m s 11 12 1314 TM 5 4210 228 14 amp P 1 Pos Benamning Kapskiva Sprangskydd Ratt for sprangskydd Stoppkn
205. ng ist l och andra metaller bor man alltid strava efter hogt sliptryck och hog per ferihastighet pa skivan Forsok att fa kontaktyta som mojl gt allt d med fullt gasp drag och reglera varvtalet genom att oka eller minska matningstrycket Working technique When cutting steel and other metals always try to maintain high cutting pressure and with disc speed Try to get smallest possible contact point Always open the throttle fully when you apply the cutter disc to the material and regulate the speed of the machine by increasing or decreasing the feed pressure Arbeitstechnik Beim Schneiden in Stahl und anderen Me tallen mu man stets danach streben hohen Schleifdruck und hohe Scheibengeschwin digkeit zu halten Versuchen eine so kleine Kontaktstelle wie moglich zu erhalten Beim Anbringen der Trennscheibe am Material ist immer Vollgas zu geben Dann ist die Dreh zahl durch Steigern oder Verringern des Zu fuhrdruckes zu regeln Technique de travail Lors de d coupage de t le ou autres m taux l faut toujours s efforcer d obtenir une haute pression d aff tage et une vitesse lev e du disque On obtient la plus grande rapidit de coupe si l on p n tre dans la mati re d couper par un mouvement avancant et recu lant Acc l rer toujours fond lors de la mise en contact du disque de d coupage avec la mati re d couper R gler ensutte le r gime en augmentant ou diminuant la pression sur l o
206. ng system malfunction is proper operation recharge inspection and maintenance To remedy as quickly as possible any disorder that may come the following table lists some of the probable irregularities that may develop and gives suggestions for corrective action Service and Repair to remedy any disorder detected through periodic inspection or maintenance examinations COMPONENT Extinguishing Agent Tank s Fill Cap s DISORDER Dents or abrasions Rust spots pits and corrosion deposits Paint peeling Fill opening threads nicked cross threaded corroded or worn Fill opening gasket seating surface nicked gouged corroded or bearing dirt deposits Seam welds evidencing discoloration or pin holes Abraded cracked corroded or otherwise damaged fill cap Obstructed fill cap pressure vent hole Threads corroded nicked cross threaded or worn Cut checked deformed stiff brittle or worn gasket CORRECTIVE ACTION Hydrostatically test see ASME plate affixed to tank and refinish clean damaged area and repaint using a primer and finish coat or replace tank Clean corroded areas with a wire brush re placing tank if there is any corrosion penetra tion or repaint using a primer and finish coat Remove loose paint with a wire brush and repaint using a primer and finish coat Clean threads with a stiff BRISTLE brush Small nicks burrs rough or feathered edges may be eliminated by caref
207. nspection 1 Check general appearance of the fire suppressing securing system and components for mechanical damage or corrosion Check actuation and agent hose lines for wear especially at points where it passes through bulkheads Consult your truck owner s manual for chassis inspection 2 Check nameplates for readability corrosion or looseness 3 Read cylinder gauge s Note pressure check ambient temperature and refer to Temperature Correction Chart in Appendix Replace cylinder s if below minimum pressure NOTE Should cylinder replacement be required refer to Recharge Section Pages 410 through 4 14 Steps 32 through 39 for correct procedures 6 1 TM 5 4210 228 14 amp P 1 MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS gt d Dm TM 5 4210 228 14 amp 1 MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS DRY CHEMICAL TANK 4 Remove fill cap from dry chemical tank 5 Check pressure relief vent in fill cap for obstruction 6 Examine fill cap gasket for elasticity cuts or cracking 7 Clean and coat gasket lightly with a good grade of high heat resistant grease TM 5 4210 228 14 amp P 1 MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS 8 Inspect threads In fill cap and on fill opening for nicks burrs cross threading rough or feathered edges clean and coat fill cap threads lightly with a good grade of high heat resistant grease 9 Make certain tank is filled with free flowing Ansul dry chemical to a level of not more than 12 inc
208. o be controlled by the MASTER switch SW 401 to terminals 1 2 or 3 on the rear of the unit terminal 4 is not connected to SW 401 For example flashing lights may be connected to terminal 1 rotating lights to terminal 2 and the optional flasher to terminal 3 If desired several devices may be connected to a given terminal provided that the 30 ampere current capacity of the terminal is not exceeded RELAY NOT NEEDED IF RADIO DOES NOT DRAW OVER IO AMPS e o ee ee ee FLA FLA FLA RING HORNA IN O O PA2100X012 Federo Signol Corporaha l 2 3 SERIAL ICOIXXX IGN RC r SFKRA 290410228 Figure 3 8 Radio Control Connections 10 TM 5 4210 228 14 amp P 1 NOTE The MASTER switch is programmed by means of the nine section miniature rocker switch SW501 As shown in figure 3 9 each section of the switch is labeled to indicate the terminal and the MASTER position that it programs ONE TWO and THREE indicate the terminal programmed by each group of three switch sections The numerals 1 2 and 3 denote the MASTER position controlled by the individual rocker switch sections For example the closed contact of ONE 1 programs terminal 1 for MASTER Position 1 the ONE 2 contact programs terminal 1 for MASTER position 2 etc Therefore when ONE 1 is depressed the device s connected to terminal 1 is are energized when the MASTER switch is set to position 1 when ONE 2 is depressed
209. o that announcements can be made over the siren speaker system 12 4 2 MASTER SWITCH The MASTER switch is a four position rotary switch that is used to control the vehicle s emergency warning light system d the electronic siren The equipment controlled by a given MASTER switch potion depends upon the configuration of individual installation In a typical installation secondary warning lights flashing lights are energized when the MASTER switch is set to position 1 Revolving lights are ordinarily stalled so that they function in position In position 3 the siren can be activated hen the siren s SELECTOR switch is set one of the siren positions In addition any combination of warning lights that are activated in positions 1 or 2 or additional warning lights can be energized when the MASTER CONTROL is in position 3 The MASTER switch position is indicated by three red LED S light emitting diodes on the front panel of the Control module The position of the switch is the off position and all of the LED S are extinguished When the MASTER switch is in position 1 one of the LED S illuminate in position 2 two LED S are illuminated and in position 3 all three LED S illuminate If your installation was wired as described in paragraph 3 9 of this manual he horn ring activates the vehicle s horn when the MASTER switch is set to position 0 1 or 2 However when the MASTER switch is set to position 3 the horn ring or o
210. o the siren amplifier so that messages can be announced over the siren speaker system 1 3 CONTROL MODULE A General The Control Module is designed to be used as a central connection and control location for all vehicle emergency warning devices along with the distribution of power and control of other emergency and safety devices normally found in an emergency vehicle 2 TM 5 4210 228 14 amp P 1 B MASTER Switch The four position MASTER rotary itch is used to control the emergency warning light system and the siren Any combination of lights can be controlled by the ASTER switch For example position 1 n be used to operate the vehicle s flashing lights position 2 can control the rotating lights and the siren is controlled by position 3 Position 3 also transfers the horn ring circuit from the horn to the siren Position O is the off position A maximum of three switched circuits can be controlled by any given position of the MASTER switch The actual deices controlled by a given position of the MASTER switch can be programmed by means of a nine section miniature rocker witch inside of the Control Module The switched circuits can be reprogrammed requirements change C Accessory Control Switches PA 2100 Only A maximum of four optional lighted pushbutton type switches can be provided by Federal for installation on the front panel of he Control Module These switches can be used for controlling vehicle accessories s
211. ocation DO NOT secure the PA 2100 to the mounting bracket at this time 4 20 HEX NUT 2 1 4 SPLIT LOCKWASHER Y 4 20X 3 4 HEX CAP SCREW V 4 20X 3 8 HEX CAP SCREW 1 4 SPLIT SA 7 29041087 Figure 3 1 Installation of Siren Under the Dash 6 When installing the PA 2100 on the transmission hump a Federal Model TU70 Tunnel Mount is recommended The TU7O is drilled and tapped to accept the PA 2100 mounting bracket Follow the installation instructions packed with each unit 3 5 POWER CONNECTIONS NOTE The PA 2100 can be installed only in vehicles that have a negative ground electrical system A Install the 50 ampere circuit breaker provided in the vehicle engine compartment Mount the circuit breaker as close as practical to the battery B Connect the red power lead of the PA 2100 to one side of the circuit breaker If necessary splice additional AWG 8 or heavier wire to the heavy red lead using the splice connector supplied C Use AWG 8 or heavier wire to connect the other side of the circuit breaker to the vehicle battery D Connect the black wire directly to the vehicle frame as close as possible to the siren 3 6 SPEAKER CONNECTIONS Either 58 watt or 100 watt speakers may be used with the PA 2100 The PA 2100 is also capable of driving a single 200 watt speaker such as the Federal TS200
212. of operation in concrete or similar material which gives rise to intensive dust The main filter is removed by loosening the nuts and lifting off the filter housing The filter can be washed lt is to be replaced by a new unit after it has been washed five times Bei jedem Tanken sollte das Vorfilter abge zogen und saubergeschuttelt werden Das Vorfilter ist nach ca 25 Betriebsstunden in Stahlmaterial und nach ca 10 Betriebs stunden in Beton oder ahnlichem Material das kraftige Staubbildung verursacht auszu wechseln oder grundlich zu waschen Zum Ausbau des Hauptfilters die Muttern losen und das Filtergehause abheben Das Filter ist waschbar Nach 5 Waschen sollte das Filter jedoch ausgewechselt werden Le pr filtre doit tre enlev et nettoy lors de chaque remplissage Le pr filtre doit tre remplac ou compl tement nettoy apr s environ 25 heures de travail effectu es sur du m tal ou apr s environ 10 heures lors de travail effectu sur du b ton ou autre mati re qui donne lieu un fort d gagement de poussi res On demonte le filtre principal devissant les crous et en soulevant le boitier de filtre Le filtre est lavable Il doit tre remplac par un filtre neuf apr s cinq lavages Vid varje tillfalle huvudfiltret tages ur fran fil terhuset skall filterhuset torkas rent Byte till nytt eller tvattat och terinoljat filter skall go ras med samma tidsintervaller som angivits ovan eller vid behov Om forfiltret
213. om of the ram by screwing the BU 725 Short Nipple into 17 BU 575 the ram bottom BU 586 er Ram can be used as is with When it is necessary to operate Ram Cap BU 575 attached to with a broader base add either the Piston and Ram Base BU 586 for Flat Push Plate BU 580 or the use in restricted areas Retracted Cleated Push Plate BU 58 These height 12 Extended height 18 are connected to bottom of Ram by using the Short Nipple BU 725 12 PUSHING TM 5 and LIFTING 4210 228 14 amp P 1 pS 80 905 BU 700 Wy sa BU 580 BA BU 907 4 BU 906 k TUBING LENGTHS E AS REQUIRED c Scr cR ar Rr RAM When it is necessary to extend PISTON the area of pushing or lifting amp beyond the length of the Ram lengths of Tubing may be added to increase scope of operations First attach the Female Adapter SL 2 to head of Ram Piston Then add Tubing lengths as re quired Next add Male Adapter 51 1 to which any of the va rious attachments in the above diagram may be added RAM BOTTOM For a firm base on any kind of surface screw the Short Nipple BU 725 into the bot tom of Ram Cylinder It is then possible to add the Flat Push Plate BU 580 the Cleated Push Plate 581 or the Rubber Anchor BU 700 depending on the type of material to which the hook up is to be anchored BU 705 Any of the working heads shown at top of illus
214. on the Field Inspection Record Ansul Form No F 7880 along with a refractive index vs concentration curve The procedures for these operations are covered on Page 1 of the Field Inspection Manual Ansul Part No 31274 at the back of this manual It is also a good idea to record the batch number s from the Ansul AFFF pails on the Field Inspection Record Ansul Form No F 7880 Appendix A2 for future use 10 Submerge hose and fill remainder of tank with water to within 2 inches 51 mm from bottom of the fill opening reducing rate of water flow as tank becomes full 11 Stir solution for 30 seconds use a non metallic rod then clean fill opening threads and gasket seating surface TM 5 4210 228 14 amp P 1 ASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS 12 Secure fill cap hand tighten 13 Read cylinder gauge s pointer should be in BLACK operating range 14 Remove safety shipping cap s from cylinder s retain cap s for future use WARNING MAKE CERTAIN SAFETY PLUG IS IN PLACE IN CYLINDER VALVE OUTLET BEFORE COMPLETING THE FOLLOWING STEPS 15 Install pneumatic valve actuator s a Extend pneumatic valve actuator rod fully and slide actuator arm on cross shaft engaging pin in hole on Quick Opening lever NOTE Refer to Appendix A4 for additional details b Insert crescent ring into groove on cross shaft c Insert anchor stud through valve body and actuator pivot member CAUTION The Quick Opening lever may b
215. oscilloscope is connected to IC101 3 waveform A having a cycle rate of 45 55 cycles per minute or Hz if specified and a nominal amplitude of 1 volt peak to peak Var varying should be observed All waveforms are illustrated at the end of this table 102 SELECTOR Voltage or SELECTOR Voltage or Position Waveform pin Position Waveform 10 5VDC 2 6 B 10 3 10 5VDC 2 6 B 160 190 3 45 55 1 2 6 45 55 3 10VDC 3 109 8 160 190 9 8 H A 45 55 9 8 10 5VDC 5 0 C 10 7 7160 190 7 AU IC103 B 10 2 8 1104 H Al 2 6 W Y H C 1000 3000Hz Var 5 3 W Y H D 1000 3000Hz 9 8 5 10 5VDC 5 5 W B 10 3 B 160 190 3 7 W Y H A 45 55 0 9 M P R 7 E 1000 3000Hz Var 8 AH 10 5VDC 8 AH 10 5VDC 19 TM 5 4210 228 14 amp P 1 IC105 IC106 SELECTOR Voltage or SELECTOR Voltage or Position Waveform Position Waveform 2 o Al imove 3 J aln 4 AU 10 5VDC 6 5 Al 70vnc To o 6 Z AH 8 Al J10 5VDC IC107 1 0VDC max D 1000 3000Hz 10 8 W Y H F 500 1500Hz 10 A 500 1500Hz 10 5 8 P R G 1000Hz 1 8 10 5VDC All 13 6VDC 11 0VDC 10 5VDC 13 6VDC A 500 1500Hz 30 G 1000Hz 5 A 500 1500Hz 23 G 1000Hz 5 A 500 1500Hz 1 5 H 1000Hz 0 8 12 9VDC 13 6VDC 13 5
216. ound valve to cylinder joint and all other joints including the valve stem If soap solu tion bubbles at any point depressurize cylin der and replace valve assembly Depressurize cylinder check freedom of move ment clean and repair or replace affected part s or replace valve assembly Depressurize cylinder and replace valve assem bly or consult Product Services Ansul Fire Protection Marinette Wisconsin 54143 COMPONENT Nitrogen Cylinder s Continued Pressure Regulator s DISORDER Missing deformed or broken gauge crystal or bezel Wrong gauge Unreadable faded or corroded dial Gauge pointer below acceptable operating range Gauge pointer above acceptable operating range Corroded bent or worn cylinder retaining clamp s Loose or binding cylinder retaining clamp s Worn or missing protective cylinder clamp webbing or grommet Wrong cylinder retaining clamp s Corroded dented or other wise damaged Regulator safety relief valve is corroded plugged dented broken or missing TM 5 4210 228 14 amp P 1 SERVICE AND REPAIR CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace crystal and bezel assembly see applicable parts list Depressurize cylinder and replace valve assem bly or consult Product Services Ansul Fire Protection Marinette Wisconsin 54143 Depressurize cylinder and replace valve assem bly or consult Product Services Ansul Fire Protection Marinette Wisconsin 54143 Check press
217. ovide maximum slip resistance when jacking against smooth slick wet or glassy surfaces SM 44 OFFSET SPREADING TOES Use on either end of ram to direct power to the sides for offset pushing Useful in narrow openings Offset permits positive alignment when pushing at a 900 angle Notched edge can be used for slip resistant anchoring SM 39 JACK BODY TOE Attaches to outside of ram cylinder Combines with Ram Extension Toe for use in spreading and lifting operations SM 40 RAM EXTENSION TOE Attaches to ram piston for lifting or pushing and can be combined with SM 39 above for spreading ATTACHMENTS meses e m SM0062 E EW Bapt SAN TM 5 4210 228 14 amp P 1 This 36 2 piece extension tube with 2 pins saves time when making long hook ups and helps prevent bowing of tubing Use with SM52 and SM58 tubing and lock pins to get proper span pieces to fit tool box BU 190 Center plug gives increased support Store as one long piece or two SM 100 SPREADER The famous P F duck bill spreader that opens up many difficult and hard to get at places Use similarly to spreader BUR 750 illustrated on page 8 of RK4 manual SM 42 V NOTCH CAP Attaches to ram piston or extensions for holding or pushing Also used on ram piston as Chain Pull Cap when using Chain Pull Kit See page 10 for hook up attachments substituting SM 42 for BUR 288 SM 24 SHORT RAM A specially designed short ram only 4
218. procedure in this paragraph The flasher circuitry has an On Override and an Off Override feature When a positive voltage is applied to terminal B on the rear panel of the PA2100 the lamp s connected to the FLA OUT terminals are illuminated continuously regardless of the voltage present at FLA IN Conversely a positive voltage at terminal A on the rear panel causes the lamp s connected to FLA OUT to be off continuously regardless of the voltage present at FLA OUT or terminal B Figure 3 10 shows the wiring diagram of a typical headlight flashing circuit This circuit is configured so that the flasher circuitry in the siren is defeated when the headlight switch is turned on A Single Flasher Operation 1 Connect a flasher control switch that is capable of controlling 12VDC such as a Control Module Accessory Switch or a MASTER CONTROL switch terminal to the FLA IN terminal on the rear of the Control Module 2 Connect the circuit to be flashed to the FLA OUT terminal closest to the FLA IN terminal B Alternating Flasher Operation 1 Connect a flasher control switch that is capable of controlling 12VDC such as a Control Module Accessory Switch or a MASTER switch terminal to the FLA IN terminal on the rear of the Control Module 2 Connect the circuits to be alternated to the FLA OUT terminals one circuit to each of the terminals 11 TM 5 4210 228 14 amp P 1 SHUTS OFF FLASHER WHEN HEADLIGHT SWITCH 15 ON
219. r Coupling Reducing 1 1 2 x 1 Twin Hose Assembly Bar Flat Steel 3 8 x 3 x 29 Lg Rod Aluminum 1 2 x 40 1 2 Lg Nut Hex 1 2 13 S S Lockwasher 1 2 S S Hose Roller Assembly Bar Flat Steel 1 1 2 x 1 4 x 33 Lg Rod Steel 1 2 x 2 Lg Pin Ring Assembly Screw Drive No 4 x 1 2 Lg Screw Hex Head 1 4 20 x 1 Lg Lockwasher 1 420 Nut Hex 1 420 Nameplate Protector Spring Hose Twinned Nozzle Assembly Clip Crank Handle 2 Screw No 10 24 2 Lockwasher No 10 2 Nut Hex No 10 24 2 Channel Steel 2 x 1 x 1 8 x 23 Lg Oo OO PON I N M OO H XH O O3 A A j N NM AH AH 8 17 TM 5 4210 228 14 amp P 1 ANSUL TWINNED NOZZLE ASSEMBLY DESCRIPTION PART NO Twinned Nozzle AssemblyS 76 Union Swivel Adaptor 1 Male NPTF X 1 FEMALE NPSM Adaptor 1 1 2 NPSH x 1 NPT Bar Tie Pin Screw Set No 10 32 NF 2A x 3 16 Lg Screw 1 4 20 x 3 4 Lg 3 AFFF Nozzle Assembly Dry Chemical Nozzle Assembly Nozzle Assembly 0 Ring Insert Gasket Nozzle Body LR44 8 18 TM 5 4210 228 14 amp P 1 ANSUL REMOTE ACTUATING DEVICE ASSEMBLY 4 DESCRIPTION PART NO Actuator Remote Shipping Assembly 322747 Device Actuating Assembly 16186 Box Mounting 32750 Screw Sheet Metal 4 19364 Fitting Tube 19407 Cover 32749 Receiver Cartridge Assembly 32763 Gasket 181 Guard Cartridge Assembly 32748 Guard Cartridge 19406 Ring Pin
220. r the solution to ensure a homogeneous solution is obtained Measure the refractive index three times and average the results as before Plot the resulting point where the horizontal line from the vertical refractive index axis crosses the 1096 concentration line 5 Connecting the three points with a straight line results in the refractive index versus concentration curve This curve should be kept on file with the Field Inspection Record Proportioning Accuracy and Calibration Once the refractive index versus concentration curve is developed it is a simple matter to calibrate or check the accuracy of your proportioner With the proportioner operating withdraw a sample of am solution downstream of the proportioner Measure e refractive index of this solution with the refractoeter as described on Pages 7 8 As before it is a good idea to make three measurements and average the results Using your refractive index versus concentration curve draw a horizontal line through the measured refractive index value on the vertical axis to the point here it crosses your curve Then draw a vertical line own from this point so it intersects the horizontal axis The concentration read at this intercept is the per cent concentration of Ansul AFFF concentrate to water proportioned by your system Determining Premix Concentration The procedures for determining premix concentration are described on Pages 7 8 Note that the refractive index
221. r to the two way radio service manual to locate this wire in the radio VEHICLE HORNS TO BATTERY CUT WIRE E TO HORN OR TO HORN HORN RELAY SWITCH FLA FLA FLA RING HORNA IN OUT 2100 012 Federol Signol Corporotio SERIAL ICOIXXX I 3 4 IGN RC SPKR O O O O O O O OG REAR PANEL OF SIRACOM T CONTROL MODULE Figure 3 7 Horn Ring Connections B f the two way radio draws more than 10 amperes of current install a 12V DC relay in the circuit Connect one end of the relay coil to the RC terminal on the rear of the siren module Ground the other end of the relay coil Use the relay contacts to control power to the radio See figure 3 8 NOTE FCC Rules and Regulations require the use of a key lock switch to control the power to a mobile transmitter Therefore wire the PA 2100 RC terminal to control power to the receiver only Wiring to accomplish this type of control varies with the type of two way radio Refer to the radio manufacturer s service manual 3 11 MASTER SWITCH Terminals 1 2 and 3 on the rear panel of the PA 2100 are controlled by the MASTER switch Any combination of terminals can be controlled by a given position of the MASTER switch The actual terminals controlled by a given position of the MASTER switch are programmed by means of the nine section miniature rocker switch inside of the Control Module To make use of this capability proceed as follows A Connect the devices t
222. raulic Jack amp Equip Serv Co 2601 Aldrich Ave So Minnesota Jensen Small Engine Service 1332 1st Ave North Moorehead MISSISSIPPI Dixie Hydraulic Service 1640 So Gallatin St Jackson MISSOURI Central Hydraulic Service Co 3101 Washington St St Louis Harry L Nolte Co 1221 Clay Ave North Kansas City Equipment Service amp Supply 1909 McGee St Kansas City MONTANA Falls Hydraulic Jack Service 307 3rd Ave South Great Falls NEBRASKA Midwest Hyd Tool amp Gun Co 4401 So 87th St Omaha NEW HAMPSHIRE J amp S Hydraulic Jack Repair Rt 3 Daniel Webster Highway Merrimac NEW JERSEY Metro Hydraulic Jack Company 52 EIm Street Newark NEW YORK Ace Hydraulic 1201 Burnet Ave Syracuse Albany Hyd and Lube Service Columbia Turnpike Rensselaer Buffalo Hydraulic Jack Service 488 Walden Ave Buffalo Metro Hydraulic Jack Company 5200 Foster Ave Brooklyn Atlas Hydraulic Co Inc 41 Hicks St No Lindenhurst Gemco Garage Equip Co 153 75 Rockaway Blvd Jamaica Buffalo Hydraulic Jack Service 629 Ramone Rochester J amp S Hydraulics 60 Broadway Albany NORTH CAROLINA Charlotte Hydraulic Service 2131 South Tryon Charlotte Power Tool Service Inc 807 Huffman St Greensboro OHIO amp Hydraulic Pneumatic Service 1401 West Delaware Toledo Eureka Tool amp Hydraulic Service Inc 3818 North Bend Rd Cincinnati Ohio Hydraulic Service Co 24 North Grubb St Columbus Kno
223. rescue operations To use follow manufacturer s instructions provided with equipment FIRE SUPPRESSING SECURING SYSTEM Dry Chemical Fire Suppression System The dry chemical system can be used on Class B and Class C fires and is very effective for exterior running and flowing Class B fires It provides rapid knockdown of Class A fires but must be used in combination with the AFFF agent to avoid fire reignition The dry chemical system is mounted on the center of the truck bed behind the AFFF system The components of the dry chemical system include a 1350 Ib dry chemical tank with control valves and associated piping three 400 cu ft nitrogen cylinders with pressure regulators a twin agent hose reel serving both the dry chemical and AFFF system a dry chemical discharge nozzle and a dry chemical turret with pneumatic control valve AFFF Fire Suppressing Securing System The AFFF aqueous film forming foam system is designed for use on Class A and B fires only It must not be used on Class C fires which involve energized electrical equipment CAUTION The AFFF solution is a mixture of Ansulite AFFF Concentrate and water It will freeze at 32 F The AFFF system is mounted behind the truck cab in front of the dry chemical system The components of the AFFF system include a 200 gal solution tank with control valves and associated piping two 400 Cu ft nitrogen cylinders with pressure regulators a twin agent hose reel serving both the dry c
224. ring and lift up the cord drum Pull the new starter cord through the hole in the cord drum and further through the fan casing to the starter handle where the cord is secured by a knot Die Sicherungsfeder losen und die Sell scheibe hochheben Das neue Anwerfseil durch das Loch in der Seilscheibe und durch das Geblasegehause zum Anwerfgnff fuhren und dort mit einem Knoten be festigen D gager le ressort de blocage et enlever le tambour d enroulement Passer le nouveau cordon de d marrage dans le trou du tambour d enroulement et ensuite dans le capot de ventilateur jusqu la poign e le cordon est arr t en y faisant un noeud 22 Gor fast andra anden vid linskivan Lagg pa n gra varv linan och montera linskivan Spann startfjadern genom att med hnan urtaget vrida linskivan medurs ett eller tv startl nan sa att starten griper in svanghjulet nnan flaktk pan skruvas fast maskinen Attach the other end to the cord drum Take a few turns of the cord and fit the cord drum Tension the starter spring by giving the cord drum one or two turns clockwise Pull the starter cord to make sure that the starter unit functions before screwing the fan casing into position Das andere Ende an der Seilscheibe be festigen Das Seil einige Umdrehungen auf wickeln und die Seilscheibe monteren Die Anwerffeder durch Drehen der Seilscheibe im Uhrzeigersinn eine oder zwei Umdreh ungen mit dem Seil tn der Au
225. s yet open to a full 15 spread It has many uses such as opening doors in buildings cars and planes and is particularly recom mended for reeing victims who are pinned in automobiles where it would be impossible to use the Ram and Attach ments Tubing may be added to bottom of Ram when it is necessary to use Spreader beyond arm s length or in lim ited working area f ggemwige 8 THE RAM SPREADING OPERATION RAM PISTON D BU 904 ram _ 4 5 For Elevator Accidents If work is restricted to very cramped quarters spreading operations are easily accomplished by first remov ing the Ram Protector Ring from the Ram and then screwing the Jack Spreader Toe BU 904 to the Ram Cylinder Next extend Ram Piston two or three pump strokes and screw on the Jack Piston Spreading Toe BU 9055 or Long Spreading Toe BU 912 This allows an enter ing wedge of only 1 which can be expanded to 6 In this operation the elevator car is not lifted but is pushed back into elevator well See illustration Page 19 17 BU 905 or BU 912 TM 5 4210 228 14 amp P 1 PRESSING OPERATIONS Pressing operations are similar to pulling operations and are used whenever it is necessary to press any two objects together such as the pickets of an iron fence BU 912 SL 7 80 775 61 1 TUSING Remove Ram Protector Ring and screw Pull Guide BU 775 to Ham Cylinder Screw Pull Arm Assembly BU
226. s the radio control circuit when the ignition switch is turned on 3 9 HORN RING CIRCUIT To connect the vehicle s horn ring circuit so that the horn ring controls the siren s Manual Wail operation in MANUAL and Il operation in WAIL YELP and HI LO proceed as follows se figure 3 7 A Locate the wire that connects the horn ring to the horn relay or the horns Cut this wire and if necessary splice additional wire to each end so that these wires can be terminated on the rear of the PA 2100 B Connect the wire that is connected to the horn ring switch to the PA 2100 terminal labeled RING Figure 3 6 P201 and P202 Location TM 5 4210 228 14 amp P 1 C Connect the wire from the horn relay or horn s to the HORN terminal on the rear of the PA 2100 The siren automatically compensates for both positive and negative horn ring circuits without any adjustments 3 10 RADIO CONTROL CIRCUIT NOTE Before performing the procedure in this paragraph ensure that the instructions in paragraph 3 8 have been performed Proper connection of the radio control circuitry allows power to be supplied to the two way radio whenever the vehicle s ignition is on or when the SELECTOR switch is set to RADIO radio rebroadcast To perform this connection proceed as follows see figure 3 8 A Connect a wire from the vehicle s two way radio relay control circuit to the RC terminal on the rear of the PA 2100 If necessary refe
227. ssparung spannen Durch Herausziehen des Anwerf seiles kontrollieren ob die Anwerfvor r chtung ordnungsgema funktioniert Da nach kann das Geblasegehause an der Trennsage angeschraubt werden Arr ter l autre extr mit au tambour d en roulement Enrouler le cordon de quelques tours et monter le tambour d enroulement Tendre le cordon de d marrage en tournant te tambour d enroulement d un ou deux tours dans le sens des aiguilles d une montre le cordon tant dans l enchoche Tirer le cordon de d marrage de sorte a obtenir une bonne prise au volant avant que le capot de ventilateur soit reviss sur la d coupeuse TM 5 4210 228 14 amp P 1 Passa in oglan pa fjadern linskivan fore montering Startanordningens funktion sa kerstalls om startfjadern linskivans bussning och starthakarna rengors och smors med s l conolja eller liknande m nst en g ng m Byte av startfjader Demontera linskivan samma satt som be skr ves ovan Lossa darefter sp rskruven som haller fast fjaderkassetten vid flaktka pan naden Place the eyelet of the spring into the cord before the fitting In order to guarantee dependable functioning of the starter unit the cord drum bushing and the starting hooks should be lubricated with silicon oil or similar lubricant at least once a month Replacing the starter spring Follow the same procedure as described above for replacement of the starter cord Then loosen the screw hold
228. strain the screen from floating out of the container during the test a corrosion resisting 100 ml graduated measure a stopwatch and a flame source see Step No 6 In lieu of the blender to generate a foam sample a small sample of foam can be discharged through the system s foam nozzle 2 Pour a carefully measured 600 ml of 98 per cent cyclohexane into the 1000 ml capacity graduated measure 3 Prepare a premix solution from the concentrate and place a 100 ml sample in the blender Run the blender at low speed for about 10 seconds to generate foam or generate the foam sample by discharging a small amount of solution from the system s nozzle 4 Pour 200 ml of this foam onto the fuel surface To prepare a premix solution first extract a sample of the concentrate using the method employed in the Ouality of Sample Section Carefully measure 10 ml of the concentrate and combine with either 157 ml of water for the 696 concentrate or 323 ml of water for the 396 concentrate Stir gently TM 5 4210 228 14 amp P 1 TEST PROCEDURES ANSUL AFFF CONCENTRATE Ei Measurement of Film Formation and Sealability Quality Continued 5 6 Insert the screen into the measure clip firmly into place and start your stopwatch After 1 minute of elapsed time pass a small 1 inch long flame several times around the fuel surface at a height of 1 2 inch 118 inch A small flash may occur but no sustained ignition shall result i
229. t colmate Ce remplacement doit tre effectue normalement une fois par an Z Bransleblandning Endast oljeblandad bensin f r anvandas Fuel mixture The engine is lubricated by the oil in the fuel mixture Petrol gasoline 1 Use regular petrol gasoline Premium grade is not necessary TM 5 4210 228 14 amp P 1 Bensin 1 Anvand regular bensin Premiumbensin ar ej nodvandig OlJa 1 For basta resultat anvand PARTNER olja Blandningsforh llande 1 50 2 96 Om PARTNER olja ej finns tillfanglig kan annan tv taktsolja av hog kvalitet anvan das Blandningsforh llande 1 25 4 96 3 Anvand aldrig Multigrade olja 10W 30 eller olja avsedd for 4 taktsmo torer Blanda alltid bensinen och oljan omsorgs fullt innan den p fylles bransletanken Tanka aldrig maskinen med motorn ig ng Qu For best performance use Partner oil Mixture ration 1 50 02 2 If no Partner oil is available other two stroke ol of good quality can be used Mixture ratio 1 25 4 96 3 Never use multi grade oil 10W 30 or any oils formulated for 4 cycles engines The petrol gasoline and the oil must be thoroughly mixed before being put into the fuel tank Always shut the engine off before filling the tank Kraftstoffgemisch Es darf nur ein Ol Benzingemisch verwendet werden Benzin 1 Normalbenzin verwenden da Super Kraftstoff nicht erforderlich ist M lange de carburant Seule de l essence m lang e de l huile doit
230. t is 1 4 ounce 7 1 g or more below weight stamped on cartridge NOTE Use cartridge Ansul Part No 24380 only Order cartridge shipping assembly Ansul Part No 7013 to assure receiving correct replacement cartridge d Screw cartridge into actuator hand tighten e Seal ring pin to actuator stem with visual inspection seal Ansul Part No 15999 50 Check cartridge in dashboard actuator if unused a Check that actuator ring pin is properly inserted and that visual inspection seal s is intact 6 16 TM 5 4210 228 14 amp 1 MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS b Remove cartridge from actuator c Weigh cartridge Replace if weight is 1 4 ounce 7 1 g or more below weight stamped on cartridge NOTE Use cartridge Ansul Part No 24380 only Order cartridge shipping assembly Ansul Part No 7013 to assure receiving correct replacement cartridge d Screw cartridge into actuator hand tighten 51 Replace cartridge in remote actuator if used a Remove guard and spent cartridge 6 17 gt d e TM 5 4210 228 14 amp 1 MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS Remove safety shipping from replacement cartridge Weigh cartridge Replace if weight is 1 4 ounce 7 1 or more below weight stamped on cartridge NOTE Use cartridge Ansul Part No 24380 only Order cartridge shipping assembly Ansul Part No 7013 to assure receiving correct replacement cartridge Raise puncture lever
231. t is twice as fast and more flexible than tubing hook ups Chain hook ups are self aligning to right span With tubing time is wasted in adjusting pieces to get right length of span BU 750 SPREADER Not an extra but a standard with the P F Hy ulic Rescue Kit Probably the most versatile 4chment in the kit the spreader closes to 1 2 to allow entrance into narrow areas yet has a powerful 16 spread Attaches to ram in sec onds and gets mto places where a jack and other attachments cannot be used e BU 911 TM 5 4210 228 14 amp P 1 ATTACHMENTS SPEEDLOK TUBING A Exclusive P F Speedlok Tubing enables the operator to make light ning fast assemblies Precision machined from cold rolled high carbon steel Faster and easier to assemble than threaded tubing No threads to become worn or damaged no time lost in aligning tubing for screwing together Pieces snap together for PUSHING pins snap in for PULLING 3 times as ast and twice as strong as threaded pipe Use these pieces of tubing in any combina tion at either end or both ends of ram to get desired lenqth of hook up It is possible to hook up for a 7 foot span when all tubing extensions are used with the Ham and an attachment on each end of span Equipment consists of 1 51 20 20 extension l SL 8 8 extension 1 SL 16 16 extension 1 516 6 extension 1 SL 12 12 extension 1 SLA 4 extension 51 9 TUBING CONNECTORS 5 to a kit
232. t och darefter startgassparren Slapp ut gas reglaget och gasen ar sparrad 1 halvgas lage Sparren frigors nar gasreglaget trycks in helt D Gasreglage Med gasreglaget regleras motorns varvtal o kapskivans hastighet E Tomg ngssp rr Sparren hindrar ofrivil ligt gasp drag nar motorn tom g ng Vid arbete med maskinen frigors sparren av handen som man h ller bakre handtaget Controls A Stop control When the button is pressed backwards the engine stops The button remains in this position and must be returned to its initial position before the engine is started the next time B Choke button A cold engine is to be started with the choke flap closed the button pressed backwards A warm engine is as a rule to be started without choke C Starter throttle catch Pressin the throttle control and thereafter the starter throttle catch Release the throttle control and throttle is blocked in half throttle position The catch is released when the throttle control is pressed in all the way D Throttle control The throttle control is used to regulate engine speed and the speed of the cutter disc E idiing catch This catch will prevent the throttle from opening accidentally when the engine is at idling speed When working with the machine the catch is re leased by the hand holding the rear handle 20 TM 5 4210 228 14 amp P 1 Regler Abstellknopf Oer Knopf ist herauszu drucken wenn der Motor abg
233. tage variations and the resultant tone frequency variations are more rapid in YELP than in WAIL D HI LO In HI LO C106 charges through CR104 and R105 and discharges through R126 R127 and Icl01D producing a symmetrical it square wave at IC102 3 When the voltage is at IC102 3 is high the VCO control voltage developed by R102 and R118 and is applied directly to the VCO control 15 TM 5 4210 228 14 amp P 1 point IC104 5 When 102 3 is low the voltage at IC104 5 is determined by R102 R103 and R118 5 3 AUXILIARY INPUT The Auxiliary Input circuit consists of CR110 CR111 Q104 C106 and associated components This circuit allows the Manual Wail and TAP II circuits to respond to the vehicle s horn ring or other auxiliary switch without regard to polarity when the MASTER switch is set to position 3 In the off state Q104 is biased off causing a low to be present at IC106 3 If negative horn ring circuit is used to trigger the Auxiliary Input Circuit depressing the horn ring applies a negative ground potential to the cathode of CR111 allowing R111 to conduct The conduction of R111 brings Q104 into conduction causing IC106 to turn on and produce a high at C106 3 This high remains at IC106 3 or the entire time that the horn ring is depressed plus approximately 200 millisecond after the horn ring is released The high at IC101 3 is applied to IC102 allowing the Tone Control Oscillator to operate s previously d
234. tating drum type hose reel is mounted on a frame behind the dry chemical tank at the rear of the vehicle The twin agent nozzle is secured on a holder through the tie bar and a ring pin holds the assembly in place when not in use A hand crank is provided for rewinding the hose after operation should the electric motor malfunction The hose reel holds 100 ft of twin agent hose two 1 in hoses combined one for dry chemical one for AFFF Piping from the agent tanks is connected to both sides of the hose reel supplying one hose reel with both dry chemical and AFFF through the twin nozzles The operator can use either or both of the agents to fight a fire Both the dry chemical and AFFF nozzles are mounted on single bar to enable the operator to move easily without getting tangled in the hose Twin Turrets Each turret can be controlled from the cab by means of a pneumatic control valve with open close positions The turrets can be maneuvered either vertically or horizontally by using the turret handles located in the ceiling of the cab adjacent to the control valve Remote and Dashboard Actuators The Quick Opening cylinder valves can be opened either at the cylinders or from a remote location Actuation from a remote location is accomplished by using either the dashboard actuator located in the truck cab or by a remote actuator located on the hose reel frame The dashboard actuator allows the operator to open the nitrogen cylinder valve without having to
235. tch SW401 make sure that SW401 is properly programmed by the nine section miniature rocker switch SW 501 refer to paragraph 3 11 To remove the Control Module from the PA2100 housing it is only necessary to loosen one hex head screw sed figure 6 7 If optional accessory switches are installed to control other vehicle accessories always check the switches for proper operation before troubleshooting the external devices The optional Alternating Flasher operates by use of electronic circuitry If this circuitry fails see the schematic diagra and the parts location diagrar figure 6 13 SW30l 6 J NUMBER SECTION A B C D E F 6 POSITION 1 2 3 4 5 6 w w WIPER WAFER NO NEAREST DETENT WAFER NO 2 WAFER 3 REAR WAFER BACK OF SWITCH 29041229 Figure 6 1 MASTER Switch Diagram 18 TM 5 4210 228 14 amp P 1 Table 6 1 lists voltages and waveforms that appear on the integrated circuits and transistors in the PA2100 when the SELECTOR switch is set to its various positions Abbreviations are used to describe the SELECTOR position These abbreviations and their meanings are as follows R RADIO W WAIL P PA Y YELP M MANUAL H HIO Table 6 1 PA2100 Voltages and Waveforms When a wavelorm is present at a given point the waveform is listed by a capital letter its cycle rate and its peak to peak voltage For example the waveform at IC101 3 is listed as A 45 55 1 Therefore when an
236. tch or horn ring switch D WAIL In this position the siren produces continuous wailing sound up and down in frequency E YELP This position of the SELECTOR witch causes the siren to produce a rapid warbled tone F HI LO In this switch position the siren produces a two tone signal This distinctive signal may be reserved for any special indication or situation 4 5 SIREN BUTTON The SIREN button activates the siren then the SELECTOR switch is set to the MANUAL position TM 5 4210 228 14 amp P 1 SECTION V SIREN MODULE CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION 5 1 General Refer to the Siren Module Functional Block Diagram and the Siren Module Schematic Diagram figure 6 6 while reading the following paragraphs 5 2 TONE CONTROL OSCILLATOR A General When the SELECTOR switch SW301 is set to the WAIL YELP or HILO position 101 and IC102 control the siren tone output The control voltage generated by IC102 controls the output frequency of the VCO voltage controlled oscillator B WAIL When SW301 is set to WAIL the Wail tone control voltage is initiated by IC102 1C102 is basically a timing circuit whose output voltage levels are used to control the charge and discharge of timing capacitor C106 C106 charges HORN RING CIRCUIT X AUXILIARY INPUT CIRCUIT ICI0 6 0104 0102 0105 MICROPHONE PUSH TO TALK CIRCUIT PUSH TO TALK OVERRIDE SW30IE MICROPHONE AUDIO FROM ADAPTER MODULE RADIO INPUT ADAPTER
237. tch to the green lead P3 pin 3 and the other terminal to the seor SWITCH TM 5 4210 228 14 amp P 1 positive hot side of the battery terminal negative grounded systems As an alternate method connect one terminal of the foot switch to the white lead P3 pin 4 and the other terminal to the vehicle frame or other good ground point sed figure 5 4 Mount the foot switch to the floorboard with the two 8 x 3 4 round head screws supplied D Horn Switch Included with the electronic siren is a SPDT switch toggle switch which when properly installed allows the user to activate the siren by depressing the horn button When installing the horn switch in a vehicle with a negative ground system with a grounded horn ring connect as shown dicus See figure 7 when installing the horn switch in a positive ground vehicle with a grounded horn ring or in a negative ground vehicle with an ungrounded horn ring Locate a convenient mounting position for the toggle switch supplied and proceed as follows 1 Drill a 1 2 inch diameter hole into the dash at the selected mounting location Take care not to damage wires located behind the dash when drilling HORN OR MORN RELAY HORN RING SWITCH Figure 6 Power Cable Connections Horn Ring Control negative ground vehicles with grounded horn ring 6 2 Connect a length of wire from one terminal of the toggle switch to the horn or horn relay A screw termin
238. the device s connected to terminal 2 is are energized in MASTER position 2 etc B Determine which device s is are to be controlled by each MASTER switch position Using the example in step A it may be desired to activate the flashing lights in MASTER switch position 1 rotating lights in position 2 and all three devices in position 3 To program the example described in steps A and B of this paragraph close switches ONE 1 and ONE 3 to program terminal 1 flashing lights for MASTER positions 1 and 3 respectively Close TWO 2 and TWO 3 to program terminal 2 rotating lights for positions 2 and 3 respectively Close THREE 3 to program terminal 3 optional flasher for MASTER position 3 seg figure 3 9 C Remove the top cover of the chassis by loosening the hex head captive screws and sliding off the cover D Program the MASTER switch by depressing the appropriate sections of 3W501 with a pencil point or similar pointed tool As indicated ir figure 3 9 the switch contacts are closed when the upper half of the rocker is pressed Any combination of terminals can be controlled by any given MASTER switch position E Replace the top cover on the chassis TERMINALS ONE TWO THREE 7904 0748 Figure 3 9 MASTER Switch Programming 3 12 FLASHER OPTION Those sirens designated PA 2100 012F on the rear legend plate include the factory installed Flasher option If your siren is NOT designated PA 2100 012F disregard the
239. ther auxiliary switch operates the TAP Il feature if the SELECTOR switch is set to WAIL YELP or HI LO The TAP II feature is operated by actuating the auxiliary switch causing the siren to Yelp until the auxiliary switch is operated again The Manual Wail signal is operational in all four MASTER switch positions provided that the SELECTOR switch is in the MANUAL position When the MASTER switch is in positions 1 or 2 and the SIREN switch SW201 is depressed the siren sounds until SW201 is released When SW201 is released the siren signal ceases immediately The operation of the Manual Wail signal when the MASTER switch is in position 3 is similar except that when SW201 is released the frequency of the siren signal coasts down to approximately 550Hz before it ceases If your installation has been wired as described in paragraph 3 8 power is applied to the two way radio whenever the vehicle ignition switch is on In addition the front panel of the PA 2100 is illuminated and the green LED above the MASTER switch is lit indicating that power is applied to the siren 4 3 GAIN CONTROL The GAIN control controls the loudness of the sound output from the siren speaker s when the siren is being used as a public address or radio rebroadcast amplifier Clockwise rotation of the GAIN control increases the sound level from the speaker The GAIN control does not control the volume of the siren The maximum usable setting of the GAIN con
240. tils 202934 202934 381035 381035 381158 381306 381310 381317 381317 35 TM 5 4210 228 14 amp P 1 BB PRRTNER Fack S 43120 Molndal 1 Sweden 701042 10 000 10 78 8730 Skandia Tryckeriet Goteborg TM 5 4210 228 14 amp P 1 1 i 8 315434 95431 5 8 312211 40395 230161 295610 2607001 gt 272003 2931001 L we 4 267204 269002 gt 2 294101 40964 303105 i 267635 Qe d THAN unm 3403313288 303110 126186 250915 5244 d 0206 Sei 2 Te gt re 1 7 78 4 4105 295608 264105 gt 7340116 407 7 225 7 m 316180 E o 0 Y 270500 4 P j 2 d yo f 5 I w nag AZ 30228 277501 mam 2 SIND 2 240177 302702 340401 0 253708 e 1 2 i 240177 264105 gt gt 90 305 267223 302412 N 200707 277502 _ Sa eg 301004 244914 aka Se bd 27758 s 302703 1272031 264505 20581 7 5 LZ 5 ET 3403917 3120 09 272028 340320 236181 31610 ponen 316184 200 Em 2 362 4 TELEX 2 53816 269036 Weg dM 314157 Gu f mR 314156 je A MICA 20 y 1581 Ser 16195 230153 316193 340314 360 3609 316168
241. tourne de facon r guili re et lors de pleine acc l ration lorsque le moteur est en plein effort D apr s la vis doit tre devissee un quart de tour Le carburateur est equip d une protection d emballement qui em p che un r gime trop lev du moteur ce qui pourrait occasionner une trop grande rotation du disque d coupeur Quand le moteur est emball et le disque est nulle charge on peut entendre des variations distinctes du r gime du moteur Cela est normal et montre seulement que le protec tion d emballement entre en fonction La vis de ralent t est ajust e de sorte que le moteur puisse tourner au ralenti sans que le disque tourne 28 TM 5 4210 228 14 amp P 1 PARTNER Demontering K1200 Lossa de tre skruvarna som haller cylinderkapan Lyft darefter av cyl nderk pan tillsammans med luftfiltret Lossa tandstiftet med hylsnyckeln som ing r verktygssatsen T ndstift Tandstiftet m ste h llas i god kondition och ha ratt varmetal for att motorn skall fungera utan driftsstorningar Kontrollera och vid behov justera elektrodavst ndet regel bor man byta tandstift varannan m nad Demontering K65 Lyft av tandstiftsskyddet och lossa tandstiftet med hylsnyckeln som ing r verktygssatsen Spark plug If the engine shall work without running interruptions the spark plug must be kept in good condition and Removing the spark plug K1200 Loosen three screws retaining the cylinder casing then lift off the
242. tration may be attached to Ram bottom by first inserting the BU 725 Short Nipple Working heads at bottom of illustration may also be attached to top of Ram Piston 13 BU 906 BU 905 In some pushing or lifting oper ations it may be necessary to have the Ram at the head o the Tubing hook up instead of dt the base This is accom plished by screwing a Male Adapter SL 1 into Ram bot tom then adding Tubing as required with the Male Adapter SI 1 at end of Tubing and then attaching any of the work ing heads as shown in the dic gram above PUSHING and LIFTING USE TUBING LENGTHS AS REQUIRED D BU 580 BU 705 Attachments shown at top of illustration may also be used at bottom and vice versa When it is necessary to have Ram in the middle of hook up attach SL 2 to Ram Piston and SL 1 to Ram bottom Add tubing to each end to get desired length Then insert SL 1 Pins in Tubing at both ends of hook up Use desired working heads at each end TM 5 4210 228 14 amp P 1 BU 580 BU 907 TM 5 4210 228 14 amp P 1 PUSHING and LIFTING BU 575 BU 912 B S 84 905 SL 1 BU 580 TUBING LENGTHS BU 907 NOS AS REQUIRED Lo When it is desirous to have the Ram in the center of hook up it can be accomplished as ol lows Starting at Ram Piston screw on SL 2 Female Adapter Next attach tubing in lengths required Insert 51 1 Male Adapter into tub
243. trol is determined by the setting of the control where feedback or squeal occurs The sound level at which squeal occurs depends upon microphone gain speaker placement the proximity of reflective surfaces etc Adjust the GAIN control to the position just below the point at which feedback occurs or as desired 13 TM 5 4210 228 14 amp P 1 4 4 SELECTOR SWITCH The SELECTOR switch is a six position rotary switch that selects the siren function The following describes the six positions of the SELECTOR switch A RADIO When the SELECTOR is in this position incoming radio messages are amplified by the siren amplifier and rebroadcast over the siren speaker system Volume is controlled by the GAIN control An LED indicator illuminates to indicate that the SELECTOR switch is set to RADIO If the system is wired as described in paragraph 3 8 power is always supplied to the two way radio even if the ignition switch is off B PA When the SELECTOR is set to the PA position the siren amplifier may be used as a public address amplifier In those installations where the siren and the two way radio share the same microphone the PA position is the only SELECTOR switch position that connects the microphone to he siren amplifier C MANUAL This position of the SELECTOR switch allows operation of the siren with he front panel SIREN push button switch the siren can also be activated by means if an auxiliary switch such as a foot wi
244. two rear mounted decklights two forward mounted spotlights and rescue equipment package The truck is a completely self contained fire fighting vehicle dry chemical fire suppression system uses Purple K as the fire extinguishing agent and nitrogen and the expellant gas The AFFF system uses AFFF aqueous film forming foam as the extinguishing agent and nitrogen as the expellant gas Both systems can be actuated simultaneously by using either the remote actuator located at the hose reel or the dashboard actuator located in the truck cab The twin nozzles and twin turrets can be used either independently or simultaneously The dry chemical system can be used on Class B and Class C fires only It provides rapid knockdown of Class A fires but must be used in combination with the AFFF agent The AFFF aqueous film forming foam system is designed for use on Class A and B fires only It must not be used on Class C fires which involve energized electrical equipment CAUTION The AFFF solution is a mixture of Ansulite AFFF Concentrate and water It will freeze at 32 F TM 5 4210 228 14 amp P 1 INTRODUCTION The following chart illustrates the sequence of operating events and the options available with this system Dashboard Remote Actuator Actuator Actuated Actuated gt All Nitrogen N2 x D T REM Regulated to 210 230 psi AFFF Dry Chemical AFFF Dry Chemical Tank Pressurized Tank Pressurized Use Use Either
245. u des Hauptfilters die Muttern lo sen mit denen das Filtergehause befestigt ist AnschlieBend das Filtergehause abhe ben Das Hauptfilter ist ein Papierfilter besonderer Qualitat es darf weder ge waschen noch saubergeblasen werden Nur Ausschutteln des Filters ist zulassig Wenn man das Filter wascht sauberblast oder mit mit Werkzeugen reinigt wird es beschadigt und damit unanwendbar Le filtre principal est d mont en d vissant les crous qui maintiennent le boitier de filtre et en d gageant ce boitier Le filtre prin cipal est un filtre en papier de qualit sp cia le qui ne doit pas tre lav et qu il ne faut pas soumettre l air comprim Ce filtre ne peut tre que secou lors de nettoyage S on le lave ou s on le soumet l action de l air comprim ou celle d un outil quelconque cela l endommage et l devient alors nem ployable 27 Vid kapning st l bytes huvudfiltret efter 60 kortimmar och betong efter 40 kortimmar Under sv rare forh llanden kommer bytes intervallerna tatare OBS Felaktig skotsel eller forsummelse att byta forfilter och huvudfilter enligt angivna tidsintervaller kan resultera i motorhavert When cutting steel change the filter after bout 60 hours of operation and when cutting concrete after about 40 hours of operation More frequent changing should be carried out when working under more severe conditions NOTE Incorrect servicing or neglect to change the pre filter
246. uch as the spotlight gunlock brake lights trunk lid etc These switches are available in two types The switch types and their typical applications are shown in Chart 1 1 MODEL TYPE CONTACT ARRANGEMENT TYPICAL APPLICATION DPOT PUSH PUSH 15 LIGHTED RED AUXILIARY LIGHTS ALLEY LIGHTS BRAKE LIGHT D BACK UP LIGHT CUT OFF GUN LOCKS TRUMK LOCK DOOR LOCIS MECHANICAL SIREN BRAKE NOTE THE MODEL CLK ACCESSORY KIT 15 ALSO AVAILABLE THIS LENS KIT CONTAINS ONE EACH OF THE FOLLOWING RED YELLOW GREEN AND BLUE LENSES THE STANDARD RED LENS PROVIDED WITH EACH SWITCH I se FACETED WHEREAS ALL LENSES IN THE KIT ARE TRANSLUCENT Chart 1 2 D Terminal Positions Most of the electrical connections to the PA 2100 are made by means of 16 screw terminals As indicated in figure 2 all terminal positions on the rear panel of the Control Module are clearly labeled on a legend plate The function and current capacity of each terminal are listed Chart 1 2 TM 5 4210 228 14 amp P 1 E Flasher Option can also be used as a single light flasher The flash or alternating rate is approximately 90 flashes or An optional internal alternating flasher is available alternations per minute The flash or alternating rate is for use with the PA 2100 This flasher is capable of independent of the voltage load and temperature switching a maximum of 12 amperes The flasher FEDERAL ww YELP MEEA 2904105
247. ue emergency When seconds count when they nay mean the difference between life and death when they can alleviate human suffering you can DEPEND on he P F Hydraulic Rescue Kit to do its work and do it well INDEX Pushing and Lifting Attachments Pulling Operations Attachments Spreading Operations Attachments for Pressing Operations Attachments for Accidents Typical Illustrations nmm eee meer Care and E Bo ze BI COPYRIGHT 1957 H K PORTER INC TM 5 4210 228 14 amp P 1 THE POWER SOURCE ALL THE POWER You NEED TO MEET EVERY EMERGENCY The P F Rescue Kit is powered by the fast action P F 10 Ton Remote Control Hydraulic Jack This fast operating power source delivers ALL the power that is necessary for ANY rescue operation In situations where every second counts the fewer pump strokes required for full extension of the ram can well mean the difference between life and death HOW TO OPERATE THE PUMP Pump can be operated in horizontal vertical hose end down or any angle position Remote control plus extra long hose permits pump to be used at a safe distance from the rescue operation when protection of the operator is involved or close up to victim when necessary TO EXTEND RAM Turn Control Lever on Pump one half turn clockwise or toward the hose end TO EXTEND Operate Pump Hand
248. ul retapping or filing If damaged or worn extensively the tank should be replaced Clean seating surface with a mild abrasive and lubricate cleaned surface lightly with a good grade of high heat resistant grease If surface is sharply nicked or deeply gouged replace tank Replace tank or consult Product Services Ansul Fire Protection Marinette Wisconsin 54143 Replace destroying affected cap to prevent reuse Clear vent hole with a stiff unbreakable wire probe of lesser diameter than vent hole Replace destroying affected cap to prevent reuse Replace coating clean new gasket lightly with a good grade of high heat resistant grease Record dents for reference in future servicing replacing shell if dents are other than shallow COMPONENT Extinguishing Agent s Gas Tube DISORDER Improper fill level Caked dry chemical Low AFFF Aqueous Film Forming Foam Premix Solution Concentration Poor AFFF solution film formation and sealability Low AFFF solution expansion ratio Bent cracked broken Loose leaking damaged or missing check valve TM 5 4210 228 14 amp P 1 SERVICE AND REPAIR CORRECTIVE ACTION Fill tank to rated capacity with extinguishing agent specified on nameplate s only Discard agent and refill tank to rated capacity with extinguishing agent specified on name plate s only 696 Actual x Tank Capacity 100 Gallons of ANSULITE AFFF concentrate Example
249. ure with test gauge Ansul Part No 2737 tapping valve gauge lightly to check for mechanical disorder gauge pointer loose or immovable If test gauge pressure reading confirms valve gauge pressure reading perform leakage test as outlined in Valve Leakage Suspected taking the appropriate corrective action indicated If valve leak test result is negative test cylinder for pinhole leak s dis card cylinder after rendering it unusable by depressurization removal of valve and destruc tion of internal and external threads if leak s is detectable or consult Product Services Ansul Fire Protection Marinette Wisconsin 54143 Check pressure with test gauge Ansul Part 2737 tapping valve gauge lightly to check for mechanical disorder gauge pointer loose or immovable and then bleed off excess pres sure or depressurize and replace valve assembly Clean and refinish repair and refinish or replace Adjust fit by tightening or loosening clamp adjust screw or replace clamp s Replace webbing Ansul Part No 3360 or grommet Ansul Part No 8688 Replace clamp s with type specified by Ansul only Replace regulator s Replace valve COMPONENT Expellant Gas and Agent Control Valve s Pressure Relief Valve s Hose Expellant Gas and Agent Nozzle s DISORDER Broken or missing visual inspection seal s Bent corroded or binding ring pin s Bent broken or missing valve handle Valve immovab
250. ustment The symmetry of the output waveform has been preadjusted at the factory and will not ordinarily require readjustment unless Q5 or Q6 have been replaced To perform the symmetry adjustment proceed as follows Rad RAT Figure 9 TM 5 4210 228 14 amp P 1 1 Remove the speaker leads connected between pins 5 and 6 Connect an 11 ohm load across pins 5 and 6 2 Connect an oscilloscope across pins 5 and 6 3 Set the SELECTOR switch to WAIL YELP or HI LO Adjust R21 for a perfect square wave on the oscilloscope Top Chassis View 12 TM 5 4210 2228 14 amp P 1 Table 1 Voltage Chart 92 E Q5 1 7 VDC 3 7 VDC 1 6 VDC 1 GROUND CHASSIS TO B BEFORE ATTEMPTING TO TAKE ANY MEASUREMENTS Q6 1 6 VDC 3 7 VDC 1 5 VDC 2 ALL MEASUREDMENTS MAKE WITH NEGATIVE LEAD OF OSCILLOSCOPE OR VTVM CONNECTED TO NEGATIVE POWER LEAD Q7 0 48 VDC 9 3 VDC 1 09 VDC 3 Q1 2 5 AND 6 MEASUREMENT TAKEN WITH SELECTOR SWITCH SET TO WAIL Q8 1 28 VDC 12 6 VDC 1 8 VDC 0 05 VAC 0 0 VAC 0 5 VAC 4 AND q4 MEASUREMENT TAKEN WITH SELECTOR SWITCH SET TO HI LO Q9 1 28 VDC 12 3 VDC 0 65 VDC 5 Q7 THROUGH Q12 DC MEASUREMENTS TAKEN WITH SELECTOR SWITCH SET 0 05 VAC 2 9 VAC 0 5 VAC TO RADIO AND NO SIGNAL INPUT Q10 13 2 VDC 0 0 VDC 13 0 VDC 6 Q8 THROUGH Q12 AC MEASUREMENTS TAKEN WITH SELECTOR SWITCH SET 0 14 VAC 7 4 VAC 0 32 VAC TO RADIO WITH AN INPUT SIG
251. utions will be determined and plotted on the refractive index versus concentration graph The straight line connecting these points is the curve which will be used to check your premix concentration or proportioner accuracy 3 Refractive Index 096 concentration Water Only Use your TS meter to measure the refractive index of the fresh or salt water that will be mixed or proportioned with the Ansul AFFF concentrate The use of the meter and method of reading the refractive index is described in detail on Pages 7 8 of this manual Measure the refractive index three times and average the values Plot the resulting value on the graph at the point where the refractive index value horizontal line from vertical axis intersects the 096 concentration line the far left vertical line 11 TM 5 4210 228 14 amp P 1 INDEX CURVE TO DETERMINE PREMIX CONCENTRATION AND TO CHECK 4 Refractive Index 5 concentration Formulate a 5 Ansul AFFF solution by mixing 5 ml of Ansul AFFF concentrate with 95 ml of your water sample Stir the solution to ensure that a homogeneous solution is obtained Measure the refractive index three times and average the result as before Plot the resulting point where the horizontal line from the vertical refractive index axis crosses the 596 concentration line Refractive Index 1096 concentration Formulate a 1096 Ansul AFFF solution by mixing 10 ml of Ansul AFFF concentrate with 90 ml of your water sample Sti
252. ux m mes intervalles mentionn s ci dessus ou bien encore au besoin Si le pr filtre n est pas entretenu ou employ les temps doivent tre fortement r duits Le filtre de trop plein d est remplac que lors de visite en atelier Ce filtre emp che les m puretes de tomber dans le carbur teur lors que les autres filtres sont demont s 25 TM 5 4210 228 14 amp P 1 SAE 30 Zen Huvudfiltret rengores fotogen eller bensin Doppa filtret upprepade g nger och krama ur det hart efter varje gang D tiltret ar val ren gjort skall det oljas in Fyll ett karl med SAE 30 olja och doppa ned filtret helt och krama ur det n gra g nger Tag darefter upp filtret och krama ur overflodig olja Ett filter skall ej tvattas mer an 5 g nger Obs Felaktig skotsel eller v rdslos tvatt ning av filtret kan resultera 1 motorhaveri Cleaning of the main filter can be done in either paraffin or petrol Dip the filter in the fluid repeatedly and squeeze it out hard after each dip When all the impurities have been removed from the filter it must be oiled as follows Fill a vessel with SAESO oil dip the filter completely in the oil and squeeze it out a few times Then lift up the filter and squeeze out any superfluous oil Never wash the same filter more than five time Poor servicing or careless washing of the filter can result in an engine breakdown Reinigung des Hauptfilters kann in Petro leum oder Benzin ausgefuhrt werden
253. ver use brake fluid or ordinary cylinder oil Provide sufficient clearance See that hose is clear when ram extends Avoid wear on hose by keeping it free from obstructions Keep unit away rom fire and excessive heat as this will tend to melt sizing in cups and cause leakage Heat also weakens the hose structure Treat the Hydraulic Rescue as you would any other piece of fine machinery Send unit to nearest Authorized Jack Service Station for service Attempt to disassemble the pump and ram units yourself Use dirty oil can or one that previously contained any other fluid when filling the ram Fill Pump beyond oil level or neglect to do a complete bleeding operation Overload the ram Never try to lift a load which exceeds the ram capacity as it will cause cracked cylinders blown cups and bent piston Over extend ram There is a tremendous force in hydraulic power and it is possible to push piston out of top of ram Pump rapidly when load is off center such as when you are using pressing pulling and spreading operations or lifting with Spreading Toes Excessive off center loads produce strain on ram piston and tubes Drop heavy objects on hose It will weaken hose and cause it to leak or burst Carry unit by hose this puts undue strain on hose 23 TM 5 4210 228 14 amp P 1 lt HYDRAULIC RESCUE KITS Guarantee All P
254. versus concentration curve should be constructed when he premix solution is originally formulated TM 5 4210 228 14 amp P 1 FIELD INSPECTION RECORD Ansul AFFF Lot No s UI 3 or 6 Concentrate Date Received __ Location Lj Storage D Installation Amount of Agent Is concentrate to be premixed either now or later D Yes O No INITIAL INSPECTION CONCENTRATE ONLY DATE QUALITY OF SAMPLE REFRACTIVE INDEX INITIAL INSPECTION PREMIX SOLUTION ONLY AMOUNT OF AMOUNT OF REFRACTIVE QUALITY OF WATER WATER CONCENTRATE INDEX PERIODIC INSPECTION CONCENTRATION FILM QUALITY REFRACTIVE FROM GRAPH FORMATION AND EXPANSION INSPECTION DATE OF SAMPLE INDEX PREMIX ONLY SEALABILITY PERFORMED BY Refractive index versus concentrate curve for premix solution to be constructed on reverse Inspect premix solutions annually Inspetconcentrate every 5 years Refer to the manual for proper procedure 12 TM 5 4210 228 14 amp P 1 REFRACTIVE INDEX EE ES E E CONCENTRATION TM 5 4210 228 14 amp P 1 THE ANSUL COMPANY INTERNATIONAL HEADQUARTERS MARINETTE WISCONSIN 54143 MANUFACTURING PLANTS AND SALES OFFICES THROUGHOUT THE WORLD P
255. wahrung abmontiert sein Alle Wartung die uber die vom Hersteller im Wartungsplan genannten Punkte hin ausgeht soll von zustandigem War tungspersonal ausgefuhrt werden Arbeiten Sie nicht mit einer Trennsage bevor Sie eine Spezialausbildung in ihrer Handhabung durchgemacht haben TM 5 4210 228 14 amp P 1 Mesures de s curit concernant l utilisateur de la d coupeuse 1 10 I ne faut jamais employer la d coupeuse lorsqu on est fatigu faut employer des chaussures garan tissant une bonne prise des v tements qui s appliquent bien au corps des lunettes protectrices un casque pro tecteur et une protection de l organe auditif et des gants H faut tre prudent lors du remplissage de carburant La d coupeuse doit tre d plac e au moins trois m tres du heu de remplissage avant d tre mise en route Contr ler toujours qu il n y a personne proximit lorsque la machine est mise en route ou utilis e d coupage Les curieux et les animaux doivent tre maintenus en dehors du secteur de tra vail ne faut jamais commencer effectuer un d coupage avant de s assurer que le secteur est bien d gag et que l on a avec ses pieds une bonne prise au sol il faut toujours bien maintenir fermement la machine avec ses deux mains lorsque le moteur est en marche I faut bien maintenir la poign e avec ses pouces et ses doigts faut se maintenir bonne distance du disque d coupeur
256. wel Terminal strip 229A115 15 TM 5 4210 2228 14 amp P 1 WAIL YELP TIMING OSC HI LO TIMING OSC Ri LSK MIKE PRE AMP EMITTER FOLLOWER FUNCTION PINS FUNCTION TAND 2 RADIO INPUT 4 MIKE SIGNAL 5 AND 6 MIKE SWITCH Figure 11 Schematic Diagram Pe ee Pins _ FUNCTION LAND 2 INPUT SIGNAL FROM MIKE 3 AND4 MIKE SWITCH 17 TM 5 4210 2228 14 amp P 1 C E NIEHOFF COMPANY Floor Mounted Switch Part No DR 139 Ansul Part No S 52920 A7 TM 5 4210 2228 14 amp P 1 HURST PERFORMANCE INC SAFETY PRODUCTS DIVISION Rescue Tool Model 3620025 Ansul Part No S 52534 A12 TM 5 4210 2228 14 amp P 1 By Order of the Secretary of the Army JOHN A WICKHAM JR General United States Army Official Chief of Staff R L DILWORTH Brigadier General United States Army The Adjutant General DISTRIBUTION To be distributed in accordance with Special List 0 5 GOVERNMENT PRINTING OFFICE 1992 0 311 831 60312 TM 5 4210 2228 14 amp P 1 RECOMMENDED CHANGES TO EQUIPMENT TECHNICAL PUBLICATIONS SOMETHING WRONG WITH PUBLICATION FROM PRINT YOUR UNIT S COMPLETE ADDRESS DOWN THE DOPE ABOUT IT ON THIS FORM CAREFULLY TEAR IT QUT FOLD IT AND DROP IT IN THE MAIL SENT I IN THIS SPACE TELL WHAT IS WRONG AND WHAT SHOULD BE DONE ABOUT IT PRINTED NAME GRADE OR TITLE AND TELE
257. workshop The pre filter can be changed without using any tools and is easy to clean It protects the main filter from becoming blocked too quickly Luftfilter K65 Das Filtersystem besteht aus Vorfilter 1 Hauptfilter 2 und Leckfilter 3 Das Leck filter sollte nur in einer Vertragswerkstatt ausgewechselt werden Das Vorfilter kann ohne Werkzeug ausge wechselt werden und lafit sich leicht reini gen Es schutzt das Hauptfilter vor zu schnel ler Verstopfung Filtre air K65 Le syst me de filtrage se compose d un pr filtre 1 d un filtre principal 2 et d un filtre de trop plein 3 Le filtre de trop plein ne doit tre remplac que dans un atelier auto ris Le pr filtre peut tre remplac sans outils Il est facile nettoyer emp che le filtre principal de se colmater trop rapidement 24 TM 5 4210 228 14 amp P 1 Forfiltret skall dragas av och skakas rent vid varje tankning Det bor bytas ut eller tvattas ordentligt efter ca 25 kortimmar i stalmaterial och efter ca 10 timmars korning betong eller liknande material som framkallar kraftig dammbildning Huvudfiltret demonteras genom att lossa muttrarna och lyfta av filterhuset Filtret ar tvattbart Byt filter efter fem tvattningar The pre filter must be pulled off and shaken ocean in connection with every tanking operation The prefilter should be replaced thoroughly washed after every 25 hours of operation in steel material or after every ten hours
258. x Equipment Service Ca Rear 344 So Main Dayton Onio Hydraulic Jack Service Company 3826 Payne Ave Cleveland OKLAHOMA Hydraulic Equipment Company 515 So Broadway Oklahoma City Mac s Hydraulic Jack Service 2108 E 17th Street Tulsa OREGON W Karn Repair Service 1215 S W 16th Ave Portland PENNSYLVANIA Equipment Service Company 1921 Callowhill Street Philadelphia Mac s Hydraulic Jack amp Equip Service 121 Putnam Street Pittsburgh ITS Company North amp Paxson Ave Wyncote SOUTH CAROLINA General Jack amp Greese Gun Service Inc 1013 Whaley St Columbia Baldwin Brothers 2132 Spruill Ave Charleston Heights SOUTH DAKOTA Midwest Jack Service 910 W 10th Sioux Falls TENNESSEE Alcott Lubrications Sales amp Service 682 684 Walnut at Crump St Memphis Hydraulic Jack Service 1710 Market Street Chattanooga Jack Flint amp Sons 244 Jefferson Ave Memphis Lubrication Equip Service Inc 315 Dale Ave N W Knoxville TEXAS Austin Lacquer Co 1400 E Fifth St Austin Bond Tool Repair Company 414 Ohio Ave Wichita Falls Hydraulic Equipment Service Co 1021 N San Jacinto Houston Hydraulic Equip Serv Company 328 Avenue H Lubbock Hydraulic Systems Inc 1825 Levee Street Dallas Schelb Equipment Service Company 1702 Rogers San Antonio Stephenson Hyd Jack Company 2421 Texas Avenue Lubbock Wesbrooks Hyd Equip Service 2012 Sheppard Access Road Wichita Falls Young s Equip Service
259. ziehen de sorte que la courroie soit d gag e En lever l crou de blocage de la vis de tension et ajuster la vis l aide de la cl 381158 La courroie d entrainement doit tre tendue au point que l on ne puisse peine l enfoncer dans le fond du bras d coupeur l aide du pouce faut une force d environ 4 kp pour enfoncer la courroie de 5 mm Serrer l crou de blocage et ensuite les deux crous qui maintiennent le bras de d cou peur Pousser le capot protecteur et serrer le volant Byte av drivrem K65 Vid byte av drivrem demonteras kopplings k pan Tre skruvar h ller k pan varav en ar inskruvad uppifr n bakom handtagskonso TM 5 4210 228 14 amp P 1 len Skruven for remspanningen skruvas till baka helt Remmen laggs ned vid sidan om remskivan kaparmen och I sp ret skivan som sit ter pa motoraxeln D remmen ligger ratt la ge fores den p remskivan p kaparmen Ny drivrem skall efterspannas d en eller tv bransletankar korts och darefter en g ng i veckan Observera att ratten som l ser sprangskyd det inte drages t nnan remskyddet skjutits p vid termonteringen Replacing the vee belt K65 To replace the vee belt remove the clutch casing Three screws hold this casing n po sition one of which is inserted from the top behind the handle bracket Unscrew the belt tensioning screw completely Lay the belt beside the pulley on the cutter arm and in the slot of the pul

tm 5-4210-228-14&p-1 technical manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

tm 5-4210-228-14&amp;p-1 technical manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

tm 5-4210-228-14&p-1 technical manual